JP2019055341A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which enables a player to enjoy a special game while reducing influences upon an operation rate of the game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine determines whether or not a winning condition is satisfied by a game based on game media, shifts a normal game state to an advantageous game state advantageous to a player when the winning condition is satisfied, imparts an opportunity to obtain the game media to a player in the advantageous game state, and determines performance operation associated with the game control. The game machine is provided with: first display means displaying the performance operation by the performance control; second display means executing special display operation generated by the performance control means; and input means allowing input to the second display means. Thus, a mini game other than a Pachinko game can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 116

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a so-called ball-type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”).

  A conventional pachinko machine performs a winning lottery based on whether or not a game state advantageous to a player, such as a big hit game, is generated based on a game ball entering a start opening. Then, when the player wins the jackpot game, the big prize opening is opened a plurality of times, and the player is given an opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls.

  Further, the conventional pachinko machine includes a display device at the center of the game board in order to variably display decorative symbols based on the lottery result. The display device displays various types of background images for attracting the player's interest in accordance with the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  In recent snapping machines, a display device is used to enable a player to execute a special game called a so-called mini game separately from a game using a game ball (for example, Patent Document 1). reference). In such a gaming machine, the player can enjoy various mini games such as puzzle games in addition to pachinko games.

JP 2002-282426 A

  In a conventional gaming machine, when the player is enthusiastic about the mini game, the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered, so it is difficult to open up unlimited use of the mini game to the player. On the other hand, if the use of special gaming machines is excessively limited, there is a problem that even if the special game is mounted on the gaming machine, it cannot be fully enjoyed. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy a special game while reducing the influence on the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the present invention performs success / failure determination of a winning condition by a game based on a game medium, and when the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state changes to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. A game control means to be transferred, a privilege giving means for giving a player an opportunity to acquire a game medium in the advantageous gaming state, an effect control means for determining an effect action based on the control by the game control means, and a display A game information recording means for recording information of a game controlled by the game control means, wherein the effect control means is a game as the effect operation. First display control means for performing a first display control process for determining a display operation and displaying on the display means, and executing a special game without being based on the success / failure determination of the winning condition Possible special game execution means, second display control means for performing second display control processing for displaying the game result of the special game execution means on the display means, and the measurement result of the time measuring means satisfy a predetermined condition In this case, when the record information of the game information recording means is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the player is allowed to execute the special game, and the measurement result of the time measuring means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, And a permitting means that does not allow a player to execute the special game even if the recorded information is equal to or greater than the predetermined value.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy a special game while reducing the influence on the operating rate of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. FIG. 32 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the pachinko machine with which the game board was mounted | worn to the main body frame. 48 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board shown in FIG. 47. FIG. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 50 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a payout control board and a board connected thereto, a power supply board, a terminal board connected thereto, and the like shown in FIG. 49. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a peripheral control board 4140 and a board connected to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 49. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 55. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 62 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a block diagram such as a memory map showing a configuration example of a prescribed storage area of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the model information data prepared beforehand by the model information data area. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 70 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 76 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 75. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 76. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game mode determination process. It is an example of the table used for the big hit game mode determination process when the big hit flag is ON. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. 10 is a flowchart of a gaming state determination process executed according to backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process) by the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in which the common image from which a display size mutually differs was represented. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a control block diagram of a peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU). It is a flowchart explaining the process of the mini game in the standby state of an upper plate liquid crystal display device. It is a 1st image of the puzzle game which concerns on a mini game. It is a 2nd image of the puzzle game which concerns on a mini game. It is a 3rd image of the puzzle game which concerns on a mini game. It is a flowchart for peripheral control MPU to control an upper plate liquid crystal display device from a stand-by state to an effect state. It is a model diagram which shows the example of the operation aspect to a touchscreen calculated | required by the player. It is the figure which drew simply the image which shows an example of the jackpot reach state displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 123 is an image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device following the image of FIG. 123. It is a figure which shows the change of the image displayed on an upper plate | side liquid crystal display device as a result of the player performing the touch input to a touch panel according to the image of FIG. This is a screen (top plate liquid crystal display device) in a state where an operation mode required by the player for the big hit announcement effect is displayed as one item of the menu screen. It is a figure which shows the state which the player is operating the new screen for selection of an operation mode. It is a screen (top plate liquid crystal display device) on which a plurality of patterns of operation modes are shown. It is a figure which shows the state which the player has selected "Description" from the menu screen. It is a screen on which an explanation of the operation mode is displayed. FIG. 24 is a second example of an image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device following the image of FIG. 123. FIG. It is a figure which shows the vibration effect with respect to the touch to the image displayed on an upper plate | side liquid crystal display device as a result of the player performing the touch input to a touch panel according to the image of FIG.

[1. Pachinko machine frame configuration]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine frame structure (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. , And A locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side The payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 that covers.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801. A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. The lower full sphere path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3. And Tsu door 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board for controlling the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding, a flat gaming panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defining a rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board housed inside the main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 A table unit having a board box 1300 and a plurality of winning holes that are installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. And a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main member.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction with a vertically long rectangle as shown in FIGS. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An effect operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 having a contact surface that can be operated by a player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a front surface A door lower right effect unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged on the right side of the visual dish 201 and rotates according to the gaming state, and a door lower right effect unit A transparent production unit cover 300 that covers the base 270 from the front side, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for extracting the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a game stored in the lower plate 202 To operate a lower dish ball removing unit 320 for pulling a ball downward, and a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall The ball lending operation unit 330 and an upper plate top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side, as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 20. Includes the sphere outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 542 and the box-shaped unit body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

  The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear after being decomposed into the main members. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from above with the button unit disassembled, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is the effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door production unit of FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 42A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit in a state where the door lower right rotating body faces forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the door right lower rotating body facing rearward.

  FIG. 43A is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the flat dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 that is attached to the center of the left and right at the front lower portion of the plate unit base 210 and that bulges forward and forms the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, a lower dish supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper plate ball feed port 210d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the ball supply port 210c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 212 is provided.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. In the upper plate body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 that is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit attaching portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And Le 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end face of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the taper portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the taper portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240 c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243 b of the base member 243 and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220 </ b> C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231 g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, and protrudes outward from the lower end to engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. To have.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. The button base 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253 c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in an assembled state from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the production operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B etc. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the touch unit 220B is lowered to the front support pin 231c. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a shell shape that extends to the left and right, bulges in the center on the left and right, and opens rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates in accordance with the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  40 and 41, the rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotary body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 42B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (the LED thereof) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire production unit cover 300 is translucent in a container shape with the rear opened. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

  43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 which is disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down and is in contact with the pressure transmission member 313 from above; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d extending continuously downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and extending downward and opening rearward and having a lower end curved rearward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324 and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 against the biasing force of the spring member 324 in a position where the opening 321a is opened. It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding projection 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding projection 322a, and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 in a state where the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding protrusion 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projection 322a is released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface in the vicinity of the right end of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card that has been put in after being drawn are returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. When the upper liquid crystal display device 244 displays an image that suggests the arrival of a chance, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to cause the upper liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, it is possible to enjoy the effects on the upper-plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get bored.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable and to reduce the interest by being looked at by other players, and the upper liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  Moreover, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage part 212a and the guide passage part 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the surface of the upper plate body 212 and the game ball can be touched by touching the outside air on the upper plate 201. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain an operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 bulging forward under the game area 5a. An effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is presented to the player in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting a ball, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are displayed to the player during the effect. By operating the player, the player can be actively participated in the production, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. And the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower dish opening 261 (upper dish lower covering part 262) in the dish unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping the space between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish covering portion 262, so that the touch panel 246 is accurately operated. be able to.

  Specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is a thickness within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand, for example, fingers excluding the thumb When the thumb is positioned on the upper side of the touch panel 246 in a state where it is in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the range of movement of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers excluding the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, it is possible to stabilize the thumb, and a desired position of the touch panel 246 can be touched by the thumb or on the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Accordingly, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be easily and accurately operated during the production using the touch panel 246. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the dish unit cover 260 to the rear, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 are gripped from the front end side and the touch panel 246 is operated. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be touched, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the finger stabilized, and the entertainment using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to increase from the front side toward the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side so that the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the performance, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side. Therefore, the dish unit 200 increases toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity of the Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the touch panel 246 and the dish unit cover 260 can be made difficult to break, and the game is interrupted by the breakage of the touch panel 246 and the like. Can be reduced.

  Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to operate the touch panel 246. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see and the same distance is provided from either side of the player's left and right hands, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the hand that is easy for the player to use. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately recognized and operated, and it is possible to quickly respond to the operation effect, thereby suppressing the entertaining of the player and reducing the interest. can do.

  In addition, an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in an operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to a touch operation by the touch panel 246, a press operation by the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is opened upward, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201 The finger except the thumb is locked to the portion 212a and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb, so that the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guide passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. Thus, the same effects as described above can be obtained, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping the gap between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 or by locking the finger to the guide passage portion 212a. Since the finger can be stabilized and the operability can be improved, it is possible to select how to place the hand to stabilize the finger according to the player's habit and preference, and more diverse games It is possible to correspond to, can be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. 47 is a front view showing a state in which the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 2 described above, and FIG. 48 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board 4 shown in FIG.

  The game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112. The game board 4 further includes a frame-shaped front component member 1110A and a plate-shaped game panel 1200. The front component member 1110A defines an inner periphery of a game area 1100 in which a game ball (also simply referred to as “ball”) as a game medium is launched when the player operates the handle device 500. On the other hand, the gaming panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A to be arranged as the rear end of the gaming area 1100, thereby forming the gaming area 1100.

  The game panel 1200 includes a transparent panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown). The panel board has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A, and has an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. On the other hand, the panel holder holds the panel plate so as to be removable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A.

  The front unit in the game board 4 is provided along an attacker unit 2100 arranged so as to extend rightward in front view from directly above the out port at the lowermost part in the game area 1100, and along the inner periphery of the lower left area of the game area 1100. A front side unit, a gate unit 2300 disposed at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left edge when viewed from the front in the gaming area 1100, and a frame-like shape disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100. A center accessory 2500, a movable decorative body 3250 provided inside the center accessory 2500, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal inputted from various decorative boards described later of the game board 4 7-segment display device 18 that displays a decorative stop symbol that decoratively imitates a special symbol stop symbol to be described later using a so-called 7-segment display based on 0 and lighting and blinking while special symbols are variably displayed based on various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals inputted from various decorative boards (to be described later) of the game board 4 Repeating variable display lamps 1701, 1702, and 1703 are provided.

  Further, on the back side of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box that houses a peripheral control board, which will be described later, is provided.

  Further, the game board 4 is divided into a left and right game area 1100 by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200. The outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 Between the outer periphery of the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game region 1100 (inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). It is a wide area where game balls can be sufficiently distributed. In the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board.

  In the game board 4, when a game ball is launched to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed by the distribution approach passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 from the upstream side of the stopping portion of the front component member 1110A. Sent to the 2530 side. Further, the game balls are distributed in either the left or right direction within the distribution space 2530 by the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 and then discharged from the discharge port. Thereafter, the game ball is guided by the guide passage 2540 and discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port opened upstream of the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. In this way, the game ball can be received through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability to the open prize opening 2103 in the open state.

  In this game board 4, when the game ball is launched to the left side of the center object 2500, the game ball is guided in the direction of the gate unit 2300 and the front side unit by the plurality of obstacle nails that are planted. When entering the warp inlet 2504, it is discharged directly above the first starting port 2101 through the stage 2510, and wins the gate portion 2301, the general winning ports 2104, 2201, the starting ports 2101, 2102 and the big winning port 2103. It is possible to enjoy the original game by the movement of the game ball.

  That is, in the route on the left side of the center character 2500, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball by jumping the game ball with the obstacle nail, while in the route on the right side of the center character 2500, The chances of contact can be reduced as much as possible to distribute the game balls in the distribution space 2530, or the game balls can be easily received by the big prize opening 2103.

  The function display unit 1180 includes a display unit 1181 to be described later, and is provided at, for example, a lower portion of the front component member 1110 as a position where the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 and can be viewed from the player side. Yes. The function display unit 1180 includes a game status indicator 1183, a first special symbol memory indicator 1184, a first special symbol indicator 1185, a second special symbol indicator 1186, a second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and a normal symbol memory indicator. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are each attached to the front surface of a function display board described later. The function display unit 1180 is provided with a connection terminal for connecting the function display board and the main control board 4100.

  In the display unit 1181 described above, a game status indicator 1183 (game status display means) including one LED for displaying the current game status, and a game ball is received by the first start port 2101. First special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holds, and the first special symbol lottery result (first special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2101 A first special symbol display 1185 including one 7-segment LED for displaying as a symbol, and a second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) drawn by receiving a game ball at the second start port 2102 ) As a second special symbol, a second special symbol indicator 1186 including one 7-segment LED, and the number of holds regarding the reception of the game ball in the second start port 2102 A second special symbol memory indicator 1187 for Shimesuru, and a. Note that a lottery executed when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is a precondition for executing a big hit game, unlike a general big hit lottery. This is a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the condition device and to determine the expected value of the prize ball amount. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if such a lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the big hit gaming mode is not immediately started with this.

  Further, the display unit 1181 includes a normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of holdings associated with the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301, and the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. The normal symbol display 1189 comprising one LED for displaying the result of the normal lottery drawn as a normal symbol, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (per condition device is activated)” ”And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103.

  The gaming state indicator 1183 described above includes color LEDs that can change the emission color, such as red, green, and orange, for example, and various gaming states can be obtained by combining the emission color and lighting or blinking. (For example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, etc.) are displayed.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 starts the variable display when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be displayed in the first special symbol display 1185 in a variable manner. Is the number of reserved (stored) numbers of the first special symbol that is reserved (stored). The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on.・ Displays the number of hold by blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holds is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holds is four, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball in the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. The number of hold is displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special Let the player recognize the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 is provided with color LEDs that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the game ball is placed on the gate portion 2301 by a combination of the emission color to be emitted and lighting or blinking. The result of the normal lottery executed in accordance with the passing is displayed. Note that the normal symbol display 1189 displays the normal symbol stop symbol in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal lottery after the normal symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time in the same manner as the special symbol.

  The normal symbol memory display 1188 is a normal symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored) when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2301 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot display the normal symbol in a variable manner. Displays the number of holds (stored). The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d having LEDs, and the normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d are sequentially turned on in accordance with the number of reserved symbols, thereby displaying the number of ordinary symbol stored symbols. To do. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round display lamp 1190a, a 6-round display lamp (not shown), a 12-round display lamp (not shown), and a 16-round display lamp 1190b, depending on how the lamps are lit. Displays the number of rounds in the jackpot game.

[3. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. FIG. 50 shows the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 49, the board connected thereto, the power supply board 851 (power supply means), and the power supply board 851. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a terminal board connected. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal plate such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 49 and the board connected thereto. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 49, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control MPU 4100a as a built-in microprocessor, a main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc. Mainly includes a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a predetermined power failure or an instantaneous power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”). Yes. The above-described main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, and controls power-on processing that is performed when power is turned on.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (corresponding to the “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built-in. The main control built-in RAM described above has, as part of its storage area, a jackpot determination random number storage area, a special symbol random number storage area, and a reach determination random number for each start storage information stored in a start storage information storage area described later. It has a storage area, random numbers for variation pattern 1, 2 and a random number storage area for variation type, and a startup storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area, which will be described later. Of these, the start memory information storage area includes a first start memory information storage area for the first special symbol and a second start memory information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a jackpot flag area capable of storing a jackpot flag value to be described later. As will be described later, the big hit flag represents not only a loss (00H) or a big hit (01H) but also a small hit (02H). Therefore, if the main control MPU 4100a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area in which the value of the big hit flag can be stored, the main control MPU 4100a only determines whether it is a big hit or lost. In addition, it is possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A first start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, a second start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2102, and a ball that enters the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general prize opening switch 3020 for detecting the played game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Also, a game ball is placed in the distribution detection sensor 2580, a gate switch 2301 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and a big winning port 2103. The detection signal from the count switch 2100 that outputs a detection signal upon detecting acceptance, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, includes a panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 4, and The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the start port solenoid 2105, the attack solenoid 2108A, the attack solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 (see FIG. (Not shown), each of which outputs a drive signal, or outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby relaying the panel from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. A first special symbol indicator 1185, a second special symbol indicator 1186, a first special symbol memory indicator 1184, a second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and a normal symbol indicator via a daughter board 4161 and a function display board 1191. 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190 are output drive signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2301, and the count switch 2100. The general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 are contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and Detection of game balls by the gate switch 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2100. For this reason, the proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2100. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 4100b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM described above, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, and the like. Circuit connections are made via the bus 4100ah (see FIG. 59). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 59). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 55) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 4100a stores various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored in the operation control signal 860a (RAM clear) when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Signal) is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Is erased (cleared).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 50, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a that also performs various functions, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 An error LED display 860b. In addition, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM, based on a detection signal output by being operated. To do.

[3-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 50, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout stores various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the payout operation of game balls, ROM that stores various commands, and temporarily stores data. A payout control MPU 4120a which is a microprocessor with a built-in RAM and the like, a payout control input circuit 4120b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and a payout control for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. CR unit input / output circuit for exchanging various signals between the output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 4120e. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated. The above-described payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, and controls power-on processing that is performed when power is turned on.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program converts various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b. Receive serial data by serial method. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as a serial serial data as a signal to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  In addition, when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal, specific frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives the door frame opening command (first door frame). When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal, specific frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. Command) (first specific frame release command sending means). On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal, specific frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program executes a door frame closing command (first door). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal, specific frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main frame) is output. (Close command) is output (first specific frame close command sending means).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and the information Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and a count switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball device 740 is first a prize. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the prize ball case substrate 754 of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 are first a rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, a prize ball case inner board 754, and It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 4120b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full is stored in the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board. 851 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 through the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  The payout control MPU 4120a also sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the prize ball case substrate 754, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state of the machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. Or output.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). The fact that there is an abnormality in electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110) is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is clear” (specifically, Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and the payout rotator is difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the count switch 751 based on a detection signal from the count switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full) When the number “7” is displayed, it is reported that “CR is not connected” (electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). However, when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (unpaid) is present)” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out is a predetermined number of balls) To that effect).

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 4100 for proceeding the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b shown in FIG. And, it is input to the CR unit 6 through a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c, such as a game sphere. The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 55) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a stores various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 4120a uses the payout control built-in RAM. Completely erase (clear). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function to the main control board 4100.

[3-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is used to relay the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the lending button 361 of the lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the rental unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (the ball lending switch 365a is turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents of the light emission are visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission is visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connecting terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has been started or ended, to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[3-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. And a launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 shown in FIG.

[3-3-1. Power control unit]
The power control unit 855 operates the power switch 852 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. Power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying power smoothed by smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates A power generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

[3-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a includes an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and whether or not to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's will A detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 to be detected is input via the handle relay terminal plate 192. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  The firing control circuit 857a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and to output it to the firing solenoid 654. By outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the handle relay terminal plate 192, one ball of the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[3-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 52, the peripheral control board 4140 performs presentation control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, while the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, and the game board side liquid crystal In addition to performing drawing control of the display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the music stored in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as sound effects, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information specifying date and time and time information specifying hour, minute, and second. Sound flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It includes and the sound effects and the like volume control volume 4140a adjusted by the knob portion of the rotating operation volume (first volume control means), a. The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal / sound control unit 4160 may be separate from each other as illustrated, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 can be substituted by the liquid crystal and sound controller built-in sound source VDP 4160a or vice versa.

[3-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 52, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 with a built-in sound source VDP 4160a described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). The stored contents are retained for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer is tie-mapped, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[3-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer is tie-mapped, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to produce a more powerful screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are completely used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the sound, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. To be adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating (this embodiment) Then, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[3-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter, “ "Regulated individual information") is stored in advance (production control storage unit). The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[3-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 53, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the supply of power is started by the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main control board 4100 (power-on command output) The power-on command (see FIG. 69) output by the means) instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on). Instructing the start of production when the operation switch 860a is operated ) It is sometimes cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is stored. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a storage area to be set. The lighting data, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for output is set, and the reception command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and sets the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 41654a RTC described later). The storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various information acquired from the storage RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae is based on a command received from the main control board 4100 (the main control MPU 4100a) and corresponds to the received command. This is a storage area in which schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and history information. A storage area 4150caj and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set with door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is a game board for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 This is a storage area in which the side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. In the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 is set. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. And the like (for example, rotation history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405) Etc.) is a storage area to be set. On the other hand, the history information storage area 4150 caj has an operation history storage area in addition to a display history storage area described later. In this operation history storage area, information related to “specified handwriting” is stored in advance as an example of a specified contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (effect control storage means). The information on the prescribed handwriting includes, for example, information on at least one of a change in thickness and a change in drawing speed due to increase or decrease in writing pressure during drawing, which is a straight line or a curve.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match, Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[3-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. Note that the content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command (see FIG. 69) from the main control board 4100 is stored in the RAM when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). Instructs the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 49 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become so. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[3-4-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, the music flowing from the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, sound effects, etc. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. And a sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a display area (first display region) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device Various character data (or splices with sprite numbers) as display contents displayed in the display area 244 (second display area) Data) or a sound control ROM 4160b (production control storage means) for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 using the serialized music and sound effects as audio data. And an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmission toward the.

  Further, in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image to be described later, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data used for display, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for icon display, main body frame rear image data used for display of main body frame rear image 740C in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 3 is visible when viewed from the player, service mode Table of service mode screen image data used for screen display, break timer setting screen Break timer setting screen image data used for, and, rest the screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is not limited to the suggested display object image data used for displaying the later-described suggested display object for prompting the user to operate the display button shown in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, contact prompting display data used to display a touch prompting display to be displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is stored (data). Storage means).

  Furthermore, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b has display sizes for the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Size-converted image data used for changing and displaying each common image is stored in advance (effect control storage means).

  In the peripheral control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. To 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After the output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is triggered when a V blank signal described later is input, The data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[3-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 is moved up from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 244. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, as shown in FIG. 54, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the hall clerk etc. of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually applied to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the notification sound incorporated in the track used. Is combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 A brief explanation of the control that plays the alarm sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the track in which this production sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set in the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value becomes et flowing volume, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  In other words, the sound that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is only the notification sound of the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the sound generation described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period of time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the display button is operated to shift to the setting mode and the volume is adjusted, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound). The speaker flows from the speaker housed in the provided speaker box 820 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the injustice to the pachinko machine 1. When a notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like of the act, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Although the silenced production sound flows from 130, it proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound is passed for a predetermined period and the speaker and door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 When the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow, but instead of the notification sound. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time and begins to flow.

[3-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 54, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[3-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as left and right difference type serial data, for example, a positive signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[3-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 52, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (timekeeping storage unit) that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source (second power source) for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a updates and holds calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b. The battery 4165b supplies power (second power) triggered by the reception of a power failure warning signal described later, separately from the main power supply (first power supply) that supplies power (first power). The supply of power (second power) may be stopped when the supply of power by the main power supply is started. In such a power supply form, the RTC 4165a is connected to the main power supply or the battery 4165b. Is supplied with power.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. For example, a screen for performing a countdown to reach the game can be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment. The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 has a peripheral from the time point (first time point) when the peripheral control board 4140 receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Information related to the time until the control board 4140 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 4100 (second time point), that is, the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. ing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information are stored as information on the date, time, hour, minute, and second that are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the ON / OFF switching of the backlight or the ON when the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be only.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. In addition, information that needs to be maintained is stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Accordingly, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust the luminance of the backlight to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode Is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be set to a desired value. It can be adjusted to brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the power-on process The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140.

[3-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a rotates the knob portion with the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Adjust by operating. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects flow from the speaker 130.

  As described above, music is adjusted from the speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob unit. And sound effects. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., it is likely that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player) For example)) flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are used for the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a). To control the adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program (corresponding to an effect control program to be described later) is different from the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages, and smoothly from mute to maximum volume as shown in FIGS. 79 to 84 described later. It can be changed and set. Thus, for example, when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, a speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 (sound output unit) provided on the door frame 5 are reduced, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating Regardless of the turning operation of the knob portion, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, for example, a maximum volume set in software) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, for example, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, for example. Or operating the pressing operation unit 405 to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode Is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Then, the value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period that is displayed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the demonstration for a predetermined time and waits for a predetermined time (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and has been sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time. When the player feels loud and adjusts the volume adjusted by the player, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time will operate the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation of the operation unit 400. The unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[3-4-5. Touch panel and associated structure]
In addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, a touch panel 246 described later is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 and receives the detection signal, the peripheral control board 4140 grasps the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 according to the contact information based on the detection signal. be able to.

[4. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

[4-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the power supply board 851 includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The unit 857 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 855b. This power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply, and plays a game ball with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle shown in FIG. The driving current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 654, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. As a result, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. Take control.

  The power generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is supplied as a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied as a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied as a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V created by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1 Current flows to the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Is charged. As a result, when +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as pay VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. To do. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

[4-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 55, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110. Among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral voltage is supplied. It is supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), three types of voltages supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 and the driving source driving circuit of the motor driving board 4180 are used. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 4.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 246, respectively. . Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the backlight power source 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 5.

[4-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 55, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

[4-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 55, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, the power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is the + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power line created by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and + 5V of the main control board 4100 The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[5. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 58 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 59 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 55 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  49 and 55, the main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and a main control board 4100g. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 57, as shown in FIG. 57, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[5-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 57, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thus, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 55 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V is created. When the circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[5-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 57, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. . Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic is LOW. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[5-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 57, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V inputted to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[5-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b detects from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020, the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2100, and the gate switch 2301 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 50 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described.

[5-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 4100a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 4100 does not have the error canceling function of the payout control board 4110, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 860a within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 receives the main control board 4100. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is not operated, while the logic from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed explanation of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the transmission line for transmitting an operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 860 a is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the first start opening switch 3022, and the second start opening switch 2109 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2100, the general prize opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2301 that are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to the input signal, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor in the same manner as the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[5-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 55, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[5-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 58, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitor voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[5-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 58, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[5-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 58, the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 and one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[5-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of output in the main control-side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 4110 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is sent out to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The control circuit 4100cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is inverted and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

[5-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 49 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 and transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 49 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function with respect to the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various display output to the reset function main control output circuit 4100ca the issue.

[5-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 55 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 57 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa to the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data, a main peripheral serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI is transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 57 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and has the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for main control board of peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply The control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2 is applied to maintain the state where the control reference voltage is applied, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured to function as a communication interface circuit. For the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply are electrically connected. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 decreases, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply When the communication voltage is applied, the state where the communication voltage is applied is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all of the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[6. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of a payout control unit, FIG. 61 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 62 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61, and FIG. 64 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 65 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[6-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Then, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 55 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

[6-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[6-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 60, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. . Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[6-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 60, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[6-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 50, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full switch 550 and the various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 50 have an output terminal of an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described here.

[6-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 5 opened from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, one end of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, one end of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 49 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR20 is The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, thereby turning on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, When the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[6-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 3 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and also at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 49 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the outer end frame door opening information output signal becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 3 does not occur during a normal game, and an outer end frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge because it is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ adopt a normally open switch, even when a disconnection occurs, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[6-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the dispensing control board 4110. When the condition is satisfied, the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU4100a are the same logic.

[6-2-3 (d). Circuit that receives detection signal from full switch]
A detection signal from the full switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Have been entered. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is paid out via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. When the control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851, and a signal whose logic is LOW is sent out. Input to the control board 4110.

  When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 50 are T-type filter circuits such as a full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. It is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3. Compared to the above, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and it is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. The payout control MPU 4120a If it is determined that the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. To do. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full with the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by rotating the payout rotator and continuing to pay out the game ball, the payout rotator itself can no longer rotate and the payout motor 744 The load is abnormal, the payout motor 744 is overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted to the rotary motion of the payout rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is adopted so that the noise component is first removed from the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. .

[6-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) in addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48. ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is inputted within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[6-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, and supplied to the dispensing motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[6-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 51 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 64, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and in addition to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, one end of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 60 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR72, one end of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal notifying that the one-time payout operation is started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. The photocoupler PIC 73 is turned OFF when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the non-reset payout control output circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, and when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[6-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 or the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 50 is input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Or outputs a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and outputs a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, a payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function pays out. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 50 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to drive the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display 860b.

[6-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[6-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65A, the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[6-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. In addition to the jackpot information output signal such as the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal via the payout control board 4110 from the main control board 4100, the probability changing information output signal and the special symbol display information output A game information signal such as a signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, an hour / medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the total number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, Accurately grasp the number of rounds of 15 hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of jackpots for 2 rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of jackpots for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling ambition more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[6-4. Touch panel module and its peripheral part]
FIG. 33 shows an example of signal exchange between the touch panel module 480a shown in FIG. 56 and its peripheral part.

  The touch panel module 480a (control means) is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 connected to the main control board 4100, and controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The touch panel module 480a includes a touch sensor 482 and a touch panel controller 481 having the following control register 481a. That is, the control register 481a can store a contact determination threshold value as a threshold value of the electrostatic capacity when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state (determination threshold storage unit).

  The touch sensor 482 detects the capacitance change at any position on the contact surface, and measures the capacitance before and after the change, while representing the coordinates of the position and the electrostatic capacitance. A detection signal is output as a signal representing the capacity (contact detection means). When the touch panel controller 481 receives this detection signal, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a coordinate value (hereinafter referred to as “detection coordinate value”) representing the position or the range thereof, while the capacitance (hereinafter referred to as “detection electrostatic capacitance”) indicated by the detection signal. It is determined whether or not “capacity” is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a. As a result of such comparison, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the touch surface controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while the detected capacitance is When it determines with it being more than the threshold value for contact determination, it determines that a contact surface is in a contact state (contact state determination means).

  When the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including detection coordinate values on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  By the way, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then operates with the sensitivity (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-192783, hereinafter “ References)). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process as described above, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance. Here, for example, a capacitance type touch panel is superior in durability to a low dura film type touch panel, but the peak point of change in capacitance is recognized as a touch point. In addition, it is necessary to adjust the contact sensitivity that changes in response to environmental changes to be uniform and constant.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the touch panel module 480a receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the outside (for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140), the touch sensitivity on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 is adjusted. To do. That is, in the touch panel module 480a, when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the touch panel module 480a updates the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command, thereby touching the touch panel. The contact sensitivity by H.246 is adjusted. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch determination threshold value for determining the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is updated at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) from the outside. Therefore, if the output timing of the threshold setting command is appropriately controlled, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing (calibration). Therefore, if the threshold setting command arrives at an output timing that may affect the game by the player, the touch state on the touch panel 246 is always detected appropriately without affecting the game. It can be an operating mode.

  The timing at which the touch panel controller 481 should receive the threshold setting command is, for example, that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the change display of the special symbol has ended, and the player has stopped playing the game. The timing with low possibility that it is contacting the operation surface of the touch panel 246 can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display is completed. Yes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

[7. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 69 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 69 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects from the various winning switches such as the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, and the count switch 2100 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper dishes 301 and the lower dishes 302. 68 (device for paying out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Command 10H to command 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a lending ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as a storage tray) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 68 (b), a payout control board 4110 from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 68C, and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general diagram synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display, test related, and others. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, statuses (1) (8 bits) have a storage capacity and indicate the type of command. (STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing variations in performance.

  For these status (STTS value) and mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the command can be disassembled bit by bit to grasp the status and mode.

[7-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the first starter switch 3022 shown in FIG. 49. As shown in FIG. 69, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command is a command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is used for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. Command. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command is a command for instructing a transition to at least one of the probability and the short time state.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect starts. The synchronized production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process described later (command transmission means).

[7-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 49, and is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1186 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 69, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the opening of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). The Nth round opening is instructed, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the big winning opening 1 between rounds (between the rounds of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) The winning prize 1 count display command is used to indicate that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (the prize winning opening 2103 detected by the count switch 2100 shown in FIG. 49). The number of game balls entered), and the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending A shall, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or releasing the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the small switch is detected by the count switch 2100A when the game ball that has entered the big winning port 2103 is detected by the count switch 2100A. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The win count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle big winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2100 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 69, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 50). Or give instructions).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clearing and RAM clearing when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interruption process.

[7-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 shown in FIG. 49, and, as shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of start of ordinary drawing synchronization effect, designation of ordinary symbol, end of ordinary figure synchronization effect, and designation of state at the time of change. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by driving of the start opening solenoid 2105. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ending per usual figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is in operation) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100A when the winning ball is not hit). When the count switch 2100A detects, or when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103B of the attacker unit 2100B and the game ball is detected by the count switch 2100B), an instruction to start a prize abnormality notification is given. . The connection abnormality display command is, for example, instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The display command is, for example, when an electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2100A, the count switch 2100B, or the like is disconnected or short-circuited. Is a command for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. It is.

  Further, the door frame opening command is transmitted from the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door frame closing command is used for the door frame closing command based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in a closed state, an instruction to end the door opening notification is given. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2100, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door frame opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 70, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 70, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140. Examples of such test commands include various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving substrate 4170, the motor driving substrate 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. List the commands that perform the inspection.

  In this main control board 4100, test command ports are assigned one by one for the convenience of the hardware, so that it is difficult to manage on the hardware side. Ports that can be managed by a software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to specific ports.

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interruption process.

[7-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 70, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and A command with a name of special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect is included. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 2109, respectively, A command for instructing a state transition from a shortened operating state to a variable shortening non-operating state, and a high-probability end designation command is performed from a high-probability state (corresponding to a probability variation state described later) to a low-probability state (such as a normal gaming state described later). The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol storage command) is a special symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (free play to the first starting port 2101). The ball enters and the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 informs the number of balls not yet used for the special symbol variable display (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 storage command (special The special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (game balls have entered the second start port 2102 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display board 1191 is still used for the special symbol variation display. The normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbols 1 held (the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 on the function display board 1191). The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) indicates that the special symbol 1 hold is a function display base. Before the first special symbol display 1185 of 1191 is used to display the variation of the special symbol, the pre-reading effect is started to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) is used before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. In addition, pre-reading is instructed to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation. In the present embodiment, these special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect commands and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect commands are also collectively referred to as “special symbol storage pre-reading effect commands”.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022, When a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on a detection signal from the start port switch 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in order to notify the effect mainly by voice. The high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times” (after the stoppage stop period has elapsed). The special symbol 1 stored command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the first start port 2101 and the special symbol 1118 of the function display board 1191 changes the special symbol). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for display, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 and the number of reserves increases, the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 from the number of reserves. The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserve balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2102 and functions). When there is a reserve number that is not yet used for the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 1186 of the display board 1191, when the game ball enters the second start port 2102 and the reserve number increases. And that The second special symbol display 1186 is used to display the variation of the special symbol and the number of reserved symbols is reduced. In a state where the game ball passes through 2350 and there is a number of holdings that are not yet used for normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the number of holdings. Or when the number of reserved symbols is decreased by the normal symbol display 1189 to be used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is activated. Sent when the number of reserved balls increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 and the number of held balls increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 increases (first When the game ball enters the second start port 2102 and the number of holds increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022, Mainly from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 52 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent acts is monitored. It is a thing of the specification to use also for. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start port winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 71, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) includes a ball round, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the ball round, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 50 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[8. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 49 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[8-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number A random number for determining an initial value for determination, a random number for determination of reach for use in determining whether or not a reach (reach out of reach) is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the first special symbol display 1185 when generating the big hit gaming state. And the jackpot symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol indicator 1186 and the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number Jackpot initial value determination random number or the like for the symbols used are prepared. Note that the random number for the big hit symbol described above is used for determining the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated. It is also used as a random number. On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for use in determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for the random number for determining per normal symbol are used. A random number for determining an initial value for determining the normal symbol and a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. 49 are prepared. ing.

  For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware built in the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value). Is updated within the value 32767) as the maximum value, and the range from this minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the above-described normal symbol determination random number and the normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-described big hit determination random number update method.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the initial value for determining the big hit determination is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off process (power-off) does not match The big hit determination initial value determination random number is a counter of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 49 that takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the big hit determination random number based on the extracted ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set as the initial value for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID that is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored Thus, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a big hit. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. That is, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1'. Even if aiming at a start winning that a momentary stop is generated at every predetermined interval and a game ball is inserted into the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 at every predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state is generated. I can't.

[8-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
In the initial value update type counter, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, and based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, a prime number. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from the big hit determination random number (for example, the value of the random number for determining the big hit game mode acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 described later) The number of random numbers that are big hits can be made not to be prime numbers. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384). In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with radio waves. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (jackpot determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability that

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) It can be said that the probability of any value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[8-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. . When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 58 (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state that the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program enables execution of a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 50 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 being operated to the main control MPU 4100a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting to boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” is a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is cut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, and a reset is detected by detecting that a high frequency has been applied, It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 860a described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing to erase the game information when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is instructed to clear the RAM, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When the process is not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the big hit determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 69 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and initial setting is performed is created. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 70 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms. At the same time, the main control program initializes the winning flag provided for each of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B to “0” and pays out the payout provided for each of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B. The execution flag is set to “1”. These winning flag and payout execution flag will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 860a (operation switch) is displayed. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the error sharing navigation command for the detection signal input with the operation of the operation switch 860a for a predetermined time from the power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 860a (error release unit) that should have been used to release an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54). .

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[8-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. (Step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 49 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, the big winning opening. A detection signal from the count switch 2100A that detects a game ball that has entered the ball 2103, a detection signal from the count switch 2100B that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2103B, and a game ball that has entered the first start port 2101 A detection signal from the first start port switch 3022 that detects the game, a detection signal from the second start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2102, and a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are detected. 49. Detection signal from the gate switch 2301, from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the payout command and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later is read, and the input information storage area is used as input information. To remember. Also, a detection signal from the first start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, and a detection from the second start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2102 When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 70 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port switch 3022, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second start port switch 2109. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2100 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103. , A detection signal from the first start port 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, a second start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2102 And the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are respectively read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2100, the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. In order to avoid erroneous detection, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2100, the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update processing. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. 68 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on this input information, The self-check command shown in FIG. 68 for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code that is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103, for example. Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detected signal has been written in the corresponding defined bit areas defined successively one bit at a time for the number of winning prize openings 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is generated as a prize ball instruction to pay out and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since there are two large winning openings 2103 as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From the inside, two definition bits for the big winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit region” and “second bit region” in this order. For example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, one definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and prepares for the next game ball to be received.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program corresponds to the prize winning opening 2103, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the prize winning opening 2103. As a result of being written in the definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out and written in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to be transmitted to the speaker by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 71 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 860a. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is output information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program creates a 2-byte (16-bit) command based on the command normally received as the payer serial data (various commands (frame status 1 command, The error cancellation navigation command and the frame status 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the main control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and a game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 even when the game state is not a big hit game state, and a detection signal from the count switch 2100 is input. When the game is in the abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-described jackpot determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. That is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out for each start storage information for which the start condition is satisfied, and used as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) ), The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the probability change hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot coincides with the probability variation determination value (the probability variation transition condition is satisfied). In this case, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. On the other hand, if the jackpot random number value does not match the probability variation determination value (the condition after probability variation is not satisfied), the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variation ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Furthermore, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program is shown in FIG. 69 when the above-described lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101. When the various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronized production are created, and the lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, the special figure 2 synchronous shown in FIG. Create various commands related to production. The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At the same time, the main control program determines a start hold display mode by referring to a hold pre-read table (not shown) based on various random number values acquired in response to the start winning, and displays the change after the start winning. Before disclosing the special symbol stop symbol, a command (hereinafter referred to as “reserved ball number change” as an example) is executed to imply a special lottery result (hereinafter referred to as “preceding judgment process”). Command ”), and when the preceding determination process is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program includes information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, as will be described later, instead of the random value itself of the special lottery. Like that. Details of the preceding determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the first special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of the special symbol, or displays the second special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so that the device 1186 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, the various commands classified in the jackpot relation shown in FIG. 69 (the jackpot opening command, the jackpot 1 opening Nth display command, the jackpot 1 closing) Display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening / closing member 2107 is opened / closed to the attacker solenoid 2108. When the output of the drive signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the round display shown in FIG. Two-round display run to light the two-round display lamp 1190a of the vessel 1190 The output of the lighting signal to 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 16-round display lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 is lit to the 16-round display lamp 1190b. Set the lighting signal output to the game state display 1183 so that it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence or absence of transition to the probability variation state is lit in a predetermined color And stored as output information in an output information storage area.

  Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, Further, when the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the state is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific gaming state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation. It may be in a gaming state. This main control program manages the remaining number of times of display change of a special symbol during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits gaming state information indicating the managed gaming state. By writing it in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (game state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability change transition condition is satisfied in this main control program, special symbols are variably displayed until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state, for example, the normal game state. Information related to the remaining number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of times information”) is included in one of the commands transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern By writing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (remaining fluctuation count notification means). The main control program may include the remaining number of times information described above in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the main control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above and performs a gate winning process based on this input information. In this gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and stores the main control built-in RAM as gate information. Is stored in the gate information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and extracts the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol from the read gate information. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the main control program performs an opening / closing operation based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are in an open state, so that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102 and the game is advantageous to the player. Transition to the state. Further, the main control program determines a normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number value, and is classified into the general symbol synchronization effect related shown in FIG. The command is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189 so that the normal symbol display 1189 is lit in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control program, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal electric power effect shown in FIG. Various related commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output described above as output information. Store in the information storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol determination taken out does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 69 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. When the game is in a big hit game state, a driving signal is output to the attacking solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, or a starting opening solenoid for opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting a drive signal to 2105, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short time medium information Various information related to the game such as output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means). The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Various commands categorized as commands and jackpots (for example, a big winning opening 1 corresponding to a big winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2100 when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 is detected. Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric effect, classified as notification display shown in FIG. Various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame shape 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, and second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 71 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 75, and FIG. 77 is a payout control part following FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interruption process, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 80 is a sprocket. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball spot determination process, and FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning ball stock number adding process for renting a ball, and FIG. 84 is an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball movement determination setting process, FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 87 is an example of the ball movement setting process. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) and payout operation (A) from the CR unit during a payout operation by ball lending.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock count addition processing for balls, prize ball stock count addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball engagement operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball engagement operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency A counter reset determination process and an error release operation determination process will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball movement determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize ball Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball engagement operation judgment setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[9-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to turn on the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 4120a (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. When it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation switch 860a is operated by determining that the RAM clear is instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW. judge.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Pinning control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read out from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 860a (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is sent to the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. From the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when not elapsed. Is set.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms have elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 68) have been received normally, payout motor 744 Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball information on the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor 744 outputs a drive signal, and the number of balls that the payout motor 744 actually pays out the game balls (In this embodiment, every time the payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is outputted to the external terminal plate 784). A display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when the determination is made as to whether or not a ball stagnation state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the ball swatch determination set as the determination condition is performed. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 1 is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball break switch 750, the determination condition is as follows. In addition to performing time management such as a set ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body, the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751, and Inconsistency set with the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball due to inconsistency is repeatedly performed Time management of counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of subtraction becomes 0. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and, when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure. It is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. The data is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. That is, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal notifying that a payout operation for paying out a ball cannot be performed can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is when the power is turned on, and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to a lending device connection terminal such as a game ball. When not electrically connected via 869, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Is output from the output terminal to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether the game balls are full or the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball break switch 750. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the game balls stored is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms and the full tank and full ball check processing at this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the time for the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the above-mentioned state information memory stores the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball apparatus 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is turned ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is OFF, the ball break is transmitted to the effect that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 68) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 71 based on the various types of information. The main control board is created by creating an opening command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame state 2 command) To 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, a frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to a game ball payout operation, for example, information relating to the location of the error that has occurred with respect to this payout operation (hereinafter referred to as “the game ball payout operation”). A frame status 1 command (first error cancellation command) including “error occurrence position information”) is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 860a is detected, the error described above. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). The payout control program transmits a body frame release command (first body frame release command) when a body frame release detection signal is input from the body frame release switch 619 (body frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) when a main body frame close detection signal is input from the main body frame open switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means; 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the state information storage area described above in the command transmission process (step S566) described above, and the machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko machines, and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receiving this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the radio device possessed by the hall clerk, and this hall clerk provides the pachinko machine with the machine number based on this machine number information. It is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 In step S550, port input processing is performed. In step S552, Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU4120a. Note that the processing of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[9-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 78 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Then, the register is switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[9-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 50 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation processing is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 79 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S618). . In the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the detection slit rotates after the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has been changed from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[9-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotator is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute a fixed position determination skip flag SKP− as shown in FIG. 80 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above described detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interruption cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 50 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch 752 Detection signal history, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 79, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, This is performed based on a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 when the latest four timer interruption periods occur. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interruption periods are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit has a rotation angle. A state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a non-blocked state to a blocked state. And three states (the “fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state in (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position fixed state in (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state in (3). Corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. In addition, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 3 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. In addition, since the period and period required for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[9-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-spinning state has occurred. To do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When this ball stagnation determination time becomes effective, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[9-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game ball is paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set so that the number of prize ball stock for lending is added.

[9-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for the award ball is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout command as shown in FIG. 82 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program receives the prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. Thereby, the prize ball stock number PBS stores the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[9-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the award ball stock number adding process for lending is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout request as shown in FIG. 83 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the prize ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The winning ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[9-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is processing to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to display the prize ball information in the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 84 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than a careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking of game balls in the storage space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and to a value of 0 when it does not reach the alert threshold value TH or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  If the game state becomes a big hit, and the player relaxes and looks at the effects unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the player inadvertently plays for one round. The game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the award ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and is provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that he / she wants to remove the game ball from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the storage space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[9-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. This paying ball sliding motion determination setting processing is performed by paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. This is a process for setting whether or not to discharge or not.

  When the paying-ball ball movement determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 has the payout control program built in the payout control described above as shown in FIG. 85 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 50 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball motion is not performed.

  When the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information stored in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs payout setting processing (to be described later) (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball prize ball number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[9-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to obtain the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stopping) the drive signal to the payout motor 744. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. The count will be described in detail later, but the count input from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the real ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the payout control program sets an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine is finished. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 was transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[9-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. This ball-spinning operation setting process is a process for performing a setting for canceling the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 87 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[9-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 88 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, The number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor coincides with the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 86. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body, and the actual counting switch Whether or not paying out game balls that do not match with the number of balls detected in 751 is repeatedly performed is determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not match due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is obtained. As a result, the value 5 is set.

  In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM shown in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM at the time of power recovery The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information To do. Thereby, in determination of step S780, monitoring of the paying-out operation | movement (retry operation | movement) of the game ball | bowl by the prize ball apparatus 740 which had been performed until the momentary power failure or a power failure is continued from the time of a power recovery. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify that “there is a payout control built-in RAM, retry error information for displaying the number“ 5 ”is set on the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED indicator 860b and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor occurs. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 49 as a RAM clear signal. The above-described main control program erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, and displays the RAM clear notification command in the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 4140. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or information in stock of winning balls) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process is stored. Based on the error LED indicator 860b, To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 emits a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red), and outputs a lighting signal on the door frame side. Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified, it can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, it has been described above that it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, that the operation switch 860a is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[9-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 89 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, and the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is usually equal to the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. As a result, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, so that the ball of the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the discrepancy between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 4 (replacement of a new stand). Since the specification can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 and the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power for the prize ball device 740 and the control power for the payout control board 4110 have common functions. It is equipped on the frame side. In the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 77 stores an inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutting off when the power is turned off. In the process of step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process shown in 76 (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and replaced with another game board 4 ′ having a different game specification from the game board 4, the payout control board is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 4 ′ is attached, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 4 before replacement is attached is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 4 'mounted, the number of game balls that do not match is generated at a probability of 1 / million, and the inconsistency counter INCC is generated. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above, it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4120a in a short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′. There is a fear. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

  As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability of one game ball being paid out due to the retry operation, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88, the process of step S778 has a probability of 1 / million from the mismatch counter INCC. The value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when five weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the control in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751, and a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 751, poor connection of various connectors, and the like occur. This is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88. Retryer to display number “5” on error LED indicator 860b Set the information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by deliberately disabling the counting switch 751 is difficult to detect. In the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that the hall clerk confirms the state of the pachinko machine 1. To rush to do. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become the mismatch threshold INCTH or more, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 751 is intentionally set as described above. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[9-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 50 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to release the error by the operation switch 860a as shown in FIG. 90 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. When the operation switch 860a is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the error cancellation is instructed, and the operation switch 860a is operated. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control program is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 77, and the read status Based on the information, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for reporting that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times) By repeatedly flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. The store clerk or the like who heard this retry operation error notification announces the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, it can be confirmed very quickly. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopped or the ball can be lent out by the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110. In this case, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state where the PRDY signal is raised, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball is connected from the output terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in Step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In response to the occurrence of the error, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, this causes an external factor. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 860a clears the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main process on the main control side is executed on the operation switch 860a (operation switch) that should have been originally used to cancel the error that has occurred regarding the payout operation. Instead of this, an operation unit for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout memory unit) It is functioning as. Further, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 860a to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not familiar with the operation of the pachinko machine, as long as he remembers the position of the operation switch 860a on the back of the gaming machine, If a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred in relation to the game ball payout operation is exhibited, while the predetermined time from the time the power is turned on according to the timing of operating the operation switch 860a. If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can take appropriate action without hesitating the switch operation by improving the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of error handling, so the game is interrupted. The game can be resumed before the played player loses his willingness to play.

[9-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 77 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[9-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. When the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control unit MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as TDS shown in FIG. 51 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is inputted pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. 91 (a) The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input has a payout control program that starts from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. A predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the time elapses. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as a monetary amount) is monitored whether or not a BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the money rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, from the timing H2 to the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 4120a holds the logic of the EXS signal HI, that is, keeps the raised state, in order to notify that one payout operation has started. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball (timing H3).

  In the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 91C, the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while keeping its logic at LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the rented number, FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 91 (c). The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The lending request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the dispensing monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above are the dispensing control shown in FIG. The time is counted in the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). Is held LOW, that is, held down, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing H1 is set to the logic LOW, that is, the state is lowered. It is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU4120a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls of 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[9-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is configured such that the CR unit 6 performs BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. A ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is used to output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started up, or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 (e) and 91 (f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and starts a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 Then, PRDY is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Is output to the CR unit 6 through the rental device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 as HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF from the timing J5 (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 94 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[10-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[10-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit 4150 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program initializes the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, the above-described movable ornament 3250, and the like. A return-to-origin process for returning the movable accessory to the origin (predetermined storage position) is performed. This origin return processing will be described later. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the contents backed up in the Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, is described for the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In addition to the comparison, the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), is compared, and backup is performed in Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The production backup information (1 fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) is compared with the production backup information (1 fr) which is the content that has been saved. When the compared contents match, the effect that is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms), are copied back to make a hot start, while the compared contents are When they do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to the bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a cold start is performed. And

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the peripheral backup SRAM 4150d is also compared with the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 53). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 53) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 52) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Next, the production control program drives the movable accessory such as the movable decorative body 3250 in the prescribed operation mode when the supply of power is started or restarted by the power supply board 851 (power supply means) as the above-described origin return processing. Then, it is returned to the specified storage position and arranged (origin return control means). In addition, as such a movable accessory, it is not restricted to the movable decoration body 3250, The other accessory or movable body may be sufficient.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of lighting the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170. Here, the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Monitor the presence or absence of operation of the unit 405, Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Thereby, although delay of processing time can be prevented, so-called frame dropping occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later, and shown in FIG. It is a mechanism in which priority can be given to synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound Is also played in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means, command receiving means) described later, from various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100. Perform (command analysis means). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start effect, the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4) ), A symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and a winning ball 2103 is received by a game ball. The winning prize 1 count display command output every time (the winning prize count command) or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of full as shown in FIG. (Command analyzing means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in progress. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door frame open command, or a door frame. Analyzes whether or not the command is a close command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 69 are classified into the various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized production, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronized production, the various commands classified into the jackpot related, and the power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 70, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 4150. The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands to be executed, for example, an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a manner different from the normal rendering mode accompanying the rendering operation, for example, a game A panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (effect device), an upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers 130 (effect device) are used. To audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 in spite of being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 based on the light emission data to be performed The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and created, set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 5 of various decorative boards provided in The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the ED is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the upper side liquid crystal display device 244 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then the device operates with the sensitivity (see the above reference). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process as described above, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the display control in a mode in which the effect control program further prompts the second display means to contact the operation surface of the contact type input means under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The threshold value for enabling the touch panel module 480a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact sensitivity adjustment means) A setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program prompts the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command). A command for executing a display operation of a screen of a mode (a mode for prompting contact with the operation surface of the contact type input unit) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command unit) ). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the presentation control program (the display control program by the control thereof) is touched on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen in a mode for prompting touching is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including the initial position is acquired. Note that this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel process, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the presentation control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, separately from the above-described presentation command (production execution command), and thereafter, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 480a (contact input control means) shown in FIG. (Sensitivity adjustment command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program, as the predetermined timing described above, receives a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 69) when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a. ) When the predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last time, or when the variation time of special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, 69), the threshold value setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 480a.

  The production control program controls the touch panel module 480a, and the touch panel 246 is touched when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a as an example of the outside. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 480a, and based on the threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value for use. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined contact determination threshold is updated, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4140a is appropriately controlled. (Calibration) For this reason, the production control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command, so that the game always affects the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of a contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is, for example, as shown above. There is a possibility that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the command or the special figure 2 synchronized production end command has been received, and the player has touched the operation surface of the touch panel 246 because the game has been stopped. Low timing can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display is completed. Yes.

  In addition, as a timing at which the threshold setting command is to be output, the effect control program receives from the main control MPU 4100a a normal pattern synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 69) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 can be set by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. The built-in VDP 4160a is controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the hall and the door frame 5 are accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the sound volume is maximum (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 53 into the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 53, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 53, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db by using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. For the purpose of preventing this, the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling in the middle. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. 92, the peripheral control unit steady process is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[10-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 52, the production control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as shown in FIG. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt for the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 53 is arranged in time series. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program determines the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. 53 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 based on drive data indicated by the pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) Rotation (rotation direction) history information 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), and subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. 53 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1) of the backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, The time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output is absorbed.

[10-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 52 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 95 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 53, and the received command storage area 4150cac in the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The received command is stored in the ring buffer.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 53 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the contents stored at the head address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 53 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 52 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 92 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting.

  The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. This main control built-in RAM stores information relating to game contents even after the power is turned off.

  The payout control MPU 4120a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. This payout control built-in RAM stores information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes an operation switch 860a. When the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process is performed from when the power is turned on, the operation switch 860a erases the information regarding the game content stored in the main control built-in RAM. The RAM clear signal is output to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM 72 for outputting the RWMCLR signal to the payout control MPU 4120a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information relating to payout stored in the memory, and when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. The determination process of step S16 in the process is performed. When the operation is performed after the period (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process is performed) from when the power is turned on, error cancellation for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the prize ball device 740 It also has an error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal to the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal to the main control MPU 4100a as the game control microprocessor.

  As described above, when the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed from the time of turning on the power, information on game contents stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is output to the main control MPU 4100a, and when the operation is performed within the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM A RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal to the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and step S16 in the process of turning on the power from the main control side to the main control side The period during which the determination process is performed (or when the power is turned on When the operation is performed after a period of time during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal is used as an error cancel signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the prize ball device 740. The error clear function that outputs to the payout control MPU 4120a that is the payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU4100a that is the processor is combined, so the RAM clear function and error clear by the operation with one operation switch 860a The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[11. Control processing on main control board]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first and second start-up winning process shown in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, which is a process of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 104 is an example of a table used for the big hit gaming state determination process when the big hit flag is ON. Note that the main control program executes timer interrupt processing every 4 ms, for example.

[Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program first executes the first / second start opening winning process (step S6110). In the first / second start opening winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 3022 and is received by the first start opening 2101, or Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port 2109 and the second start port 2102 has received the game ball.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and if this processing flag is 0, executes a change start process (step S6130). Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that, for example, the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information already stored in the start storage information storage area. In this variation start process, the main control program performs setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning the big hit, Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, a first mode in which the main control program variably displays the first special symbol (special one symbol) using the first special symbol indicator 1185 every time the start condition is satisfied is defined. A second mode in which a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means) or a second special symbol display unit 1186 is used to variably display the second special symbol (special 2 symbol). The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means), and then the processing flag is updated to 2. This variation pattern represents the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186. ing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). If this process flag is 2, the following changing process is executed (step S6180). In this changing process, the main control program monitors the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S6150) with a timer, and triggered by the time-out, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second The special symbol change display using the special symbol indicator 1186 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the winning condition for the big hit game is established in the big hit lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines that the winning condition for the small hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions is satisfied in the big hit lottery and the winning flag is not won, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is executed again from the variation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). When the process flag is 3, the main control program executes a jackpot game preparation process (step S6200). In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, to determine the mode of the jackpot game, and this determined jackpot game The mode (for example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous activation device is activated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the process flag is 4, the following jackpot game process is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game process, the main control program determines one of the rounds based on the number of rounds, the number of times opened, the opening time, and the number of game balls to be won as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and in the first special game, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is performed. In the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B is executed and the opening / closing operation of the one opening / closing member 2106A is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following process when the small hit is established is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of opening times and the opening time in order to control the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 as a small hitting game mode. Thereafter, the main control program controls the opening / closing member 2106 to be in a closed state after opening the opening / closing member 2106 once only for a very short time, for example, based on the set number of opening times and opening time. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the change start process (step S6130) is performed again. The small hit game is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but is a kind of big hit game, for example, a game in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened only for a very short time (so-called short open big hit game). A game having a mode very similar to (game).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hitting establishment process S6240 depending on whether or not the process flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. Can be selected. That is, if the processing flag is in the range of 0-5, the main control program can be a game including a small hit game, whereas if the processing flag is in the range of 0-4, the main control program does not include the small hit game. It can be a game. As described above, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process includes the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hit establishment process S6240. It is assumed that it is not unused program code. That is, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead of executing the small hitting establishment process S6240. With such a program structure, it is possible to share a program code even among models having different gaming characteristics whether or not a small hit game is included. For example, different models depending on whether or not a small hit game is included There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and then The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[First and second starting entry prize processing]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning process (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first and second start opening winning process (step S6110) is a process related to a determination as to whether or not a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102 and that there has been the reception. On the condition that is determined, includes processing for updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

[Entering a game ball into the second starting port]
First, the main control program determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109 (step S6201), and if it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109, the second start port It is determined that the game ball is received in 2102 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In this step S6202, the main control program obtains various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning.

  In addition, this main control program is combined with the jackpot determination random number and the like in response to the start winning, instead of acquiring the jackpot game mode determination random value (for example, the round number determination random value), that is, the big prize opening 2103 While the state of opening is not determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop symbol are determined to advance the game. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying a special symbol stop symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. With this as a trigger, a random value for determining the big hit game mode is acquired.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process which will be described later.

  First, in the second start hold storage process, the main control program acquires start storage information (a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, etc. acquired when a game ball is received in the second start port 2102) ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension (step S6203). That is, for the second special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for each special symbol type. The predetermined start number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program reads the second start memory information even when a new game ball is received in the second start port 2102, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (when the start prize is received). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start port winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second start port 2102 in the transmission information storage area, and the start port in the command transmission process described above. The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second start memory information is stored in the second start memory information storage area (that is, the number of second start memory information of the second special symbol is increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means). As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1 and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read, and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, (This is referred to as “holding pre-draw lottery”)

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the hold prefetch command transmission process described later when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, and the following hold prefetch command transmission process when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute.

  In the hold prefetch command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command instructing that the hold prefetch effect should be started for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetch command, a special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 2 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. The prefetch information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 2 type prefetch command includes information regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is information which shows either. This special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command includes information on the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the above-described special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, and uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means). That is, the main control program stores the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 74). Here, “suppression” indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program starts the condition corresponding to the at least one start memory information stored in the first or second start memory information storage area in the second special symbol memory display 1187. In a mode in which the at least one first or second start memory information can be specified during the period until the establishment of the first special symbol memory display 1184 or the second special symbol memory display 1187, a hold display mode ( For example, lighting, blinking or extinguishing), and then corresponding to the starting storage information to be prioritized among the at least one first or second starting storage information stored by the first or second starting storage information storage means When the start condition is established, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the first or second From the start memory information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

[Entering a game ball into the first starting port]
On the other hand, if the detection signal is not output from the second start port switch 2109 in step S6201, or if the value of the second hold number counter is 4 that is the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program Determines whether a detection signal is output from the first start port switch 3022 (step S6205). When a detection signal is output from the first start port switch 3022, the main control program determines that a game ball has been received at the first start port 2101 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (first special symbol). In step S6206, the following step S6206 is executed. In this step S6206, the main control program obtains various random values for the first special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The number of first start storage information (corresponding to the various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as “first hold number counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In the first start hold storage process, the main control program uses the start storage information (such as the big hit determination random number value, the big hit symbol random number value) acquired when the game ball is received in the first start port 2101 as a special For example, a predetermined storage area (RAM) is stored in a first start storage information storage area that is a part of the main control RAM while being associated with the symbol type and the order of holding (step S6207). That is, for the first special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for the first special symbol, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol. Are stored in the first start memory information storage area (start memory information storage means, first start memory information storage means) up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the main control program stores all the first start memory information when a new game ball is received by the first start port 2101, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of start winning). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening prize command indicating that the game ball has been received in the first start opening 2101 in the transmission information storage area, and starts start winning prize in the command transmission process described above. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this way, the peripheral control board 4140 can execute a hold pre-reading effect, which will be described later, using the start opening prize command.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first start memory information is stored in the first start memory information storage area (that is, the number of first start memory information of the first special symbol has increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following prior determination condition is satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1, and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the first special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter referred to as the random number value). , Called “holding prefetch lottery”).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a hold prefetch command transmission process, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, while when the predetermination condition is satisfied, the following hold prefetch command transmission is performed. Execute the process.

  In this hold prefetch command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command instructing that the hold prefetch effect should be started for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 1 variation allocation table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes the symbol type of the first special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 1 type prefetch command includes information related to the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is information which shows either. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the above-described special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command uses the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command, as will be described later, and holds the pre-read pre-reading described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means). That is, the main control program reads the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state in this way. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 74). Here, “suppression” indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the startup storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program waits until the start condition corresponding to the at least one start-up storage information stored in the start-up storage information storage area is satisfied in the first special symbol storage display 1184. The at least one start memory stored in the start memory information storage area is derived by deriving a hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) in a manner that allows the at least one start memory information to be specified in between. When the start condition corresponding to the startup storage information to be prioritized among the information is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the startup storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority is given to the start storage information storage area. The starting memory information to be deleted is erased (holding digestion control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 when the game ball is not accepted at the first start port 2101 in step S6205 or when the counter value of the first holding number counter reaches the upper limit value in the process of step S6206. If yes, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

[Variation start processing]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation start process shown in FIG.
In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area in the start storage information storage area described above. The value of the second special symbol holding number counter indicates the number of second starting storage information (random value) stored in the second starting storage information storage area in the above-described starting storage information storage area. . If the main control program determines in step S301 described above that the value of the number-of-holds counter for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0, the start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both After determining that it has not been established and ending this variation starting process and ending the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above.

  On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number-of-holds counter for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0, the start condition is set for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is assumed that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and it is determined that the engine is in a so-called start suspension state. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start memory information is not zero, the main control program acquires the second start memory information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above. A predetermined number of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6304). More specifically, the main control program stores the second start storage information (random value) stored in the n th storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more) obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality. Are shifted and stored in the (n-1) th storage area. Thereby, at least a storage area is vacant, and new start-up storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy occurs. At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol variation flag to 1 (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the second special symbol hold count counter, that is, the number of the second start memory information (step S6306). . At the same time, the main control program controls the lighting state of the second special symbol memory display 1187 so as to indicate the number of second starting memory information after the subtraction (the number of second special symbols held). Note that the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is reset when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing is completed, for example.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second startup storage information is 0, the main control program acquires the first startup storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) and then described above. A predetermined number of first start memory information stored in the first start memory information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6308). Specifically, each of the first start storage information storage area and the second start storage information storage area is provided with four storage areas (first to fourth sections). In each of these storage areas, a big hit determination random number storage area for storing the big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number storage area for storing the big hit symbol random number value, and a reach determination random number value are stored. There are provided a random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and a random pattern for random pattern 1, 2 storage area for storing variable display pattern random values for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  The main control program stores the second start storage information (random number) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area divided into a plurality of the first start storage information storage areas. Shift to the storage area. As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start-up storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred. At the same time, the main control program sets 2 to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts 1 from the value of the first special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of second start memory information (step S6310). . At the same time, the main control program controls the lighting state of the first special symbol memory display 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start memory information after the subtraction (the number of first special symbols held). The special symbol variation flag set to 2 in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing ends.

  Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of jackpot (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function operating determination table set with a high probability of winning a jackpot (step S6314).

  Next, the main control program determines whether the first special symbol random value or the second special symbol random value (hereinafter also referred to as “big hit determination random number”) acquired in step S6303 or step S6307 is a big hit based on the selected table. It is determined whether or not it matches a value (random value corresponding to jackpot) (step S6315). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied (lottery means). When the jackpot value matches, the main control program is the jackpot of the jackpot type based on the jackpot determination random value, that is, the type that activates at least one of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function (the state type related to the gaming state). This is determined (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number obtained in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.
First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the big hit flags is ON, the main control program executes a big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S6402). In this big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process, a fluctuation pattern table for winning big hits (a big hit fluctuation pattern table as a fluctuation pattern table at the time of winning) is set, and if the winning conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation to win the big hit A pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means and has been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and the start condition is satisfied. Regarding the stored information, the reach condition as a condition to execute a reach effect that implies that the winning condition may be satisfied, that is, the special lottery may be won, or the reach condition is specified. It is determined whether or not the reach condition is satisfied (step S6403). Note that the reach condition here means that it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is easy for the player to hold the expectation of winning the special lottery relatively easily. Normal reach as an example, and a specific aspect of reach production that makes it relatively easy for players to hold the expectation of winning a special lottery with a relatively high probability of winning This is a condition for executing any one of the super-reach as an example. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as “reach lottery”.

  By the way, the main control program stores the winning probability of such reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “reach lottery winning probability”) in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Control is performed so as to change in stages according to the number of already-started storage information. Specifically, the main control program, when the winning probability of the reach lottery is 0, for example, when it is 0, 1/15 or 1 according to the number of stored start storage information (so-called holding number) Is controlled so that 1/14, 2 is 1/13, 3 is 1/10, and 4 is 1/10.

  On the other hand, as the reach condition as described above, the main control program determines that the reach determination random number value acquired in the reach determination random number storage area of the main control built-in RAM is the next within the range that the reach determination random number can take. It is determined whether or not it belongs to a specific range. As a range that such reach determination random numbers can take (for example, 0 to 199 is exemplified), the main control program always reaches a reach range (0 to 10) that satisfies the reach condition, and always specifies a specific reach condition in the reach range. The specific reach range to satisfy (0 to 1), the reach condition or the non-reach range that cannot satisfy the specific reach condition (15 to 199), and the reach condition or the specific reach condition may be satisfied. The reach / non-reach range (10 to 14), which may not be satisfied, is managed separately (random number range information control means).

  Further, the main control program has already described a reach random number range command (see FIG. 70) indicating the random number range (reach range, specific reach range, non-reach range, or reach / non-reach range) to which the reach determination random value belongs. Are written in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are transmitted in the command transmission process described above (random number range information control means). That is, the main control program associates each start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, instead of transmitting the determination reach random number value itself to the peripheral control board 4140. The reach random number range command is transmitted as information on the random number range to which the reach determination random value belongs. The reach random number range command corresponds to the first special symbol reach random number range command indicating the random number range to which the reach random number value corresponding to the start memory information related to the first special symbol and the start memory information related to the second special symbol. This command name is a generic name for the second special symbol reach random number range command representing the random number range to which the reach random number value belongs (see FIG. 70).

  When it is determined that the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the main control program executes a reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In this reach-losing variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (reach-losing variation pattern table) for executing a reach effect to make a loss.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction), the main control program performs the above-described reach effect and causes a loss. A variation pattern table including a pattern (time-short non-winning variation pattern) (time-short reach-losing variation pattern table as a time-short non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, if the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program executes the reach effect described above and A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-temporal reach variation variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) including a variation pattern (non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the short-time reach loss variation pattern table and the non-short-time reach loss variation pattern table are also collectively referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern table”. In the present embodiment, the main control program has not only “big hit”, “small hit” and “losing” as the lottery result of the lottery on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, but also this “losing” is activated by the time shortening function. It is also controlled separately whether it is a “non-short-time loss” as a “lack” in a state where the time-shortening function is not performed or a “short-time loss” in a state where the time-shortening function is activated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes a non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In this non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) that is lost without executing the reach effect. A non-reach loss variation pattern table is prepared in association with a plurality of game states, respectively. It has become.

  Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not satisfied, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating, and similarly to the above, whether or not the time reduction function is operating. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. In other words, the main control program loses the game without executing the reach effect described above when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction). For this purpose, a fluctuation pattern table (time-short non-reach fluctuation pattern table as a time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-reach loss variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are collectively referred to as “variation pattern commands”. The pattern command of the variation pattern includes information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a winning result regarding the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the variation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, if the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is a big hit fluctuation pattern table, the main control program determines the big hit fluctuation time according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern table. To the timer. On the other hand, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a small hit variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this small hit variation pattern table, Set the variable time for the timer.

  Further, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a short-time reach loss variation pattern table, according to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the short-time reach loss variation pattern table, Set the time change variable for the timer to the timer. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a non-temporal reach reach variation pattern table, the main control program responds to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the non-temporal reach loss variation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-short-time reach is set in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is “losing”, the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic variation time and the addition variation time as 2-byte data as the variation time of such a special symbol, and the maximum variation time that is the total value of these times is set. 262.144 s (65536 × 4 ms) × 2 = 524.288 s, and a special symbol variation time twice as long as before, in which each time is managed by 1 byte, is realized.

  When the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program next sets the special symbol LED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above when the start condition is satisfied. At least one of the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) is caused to start a variable display composed of a plurality of LED lighting patterns according to the determined variation pattern. (Design variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414) and ends the variation pattern setting process as described above.

  Thus, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program receives the pattern command and winning information command already written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Read out and transmit to the peripheral control unit 4140.

[In-flight processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the variation time set in the timer in the above-described step S6412 (see FIG. 100) has expired (step S6501), and the variation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time set in the timer has expired, the main control program sets the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program, according to the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, the first special symbol indicator 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol indicator 1186 (variable display). Means) is used to stop the change display (variation of special symbols) consisting of a change pattern of the lighting, extinction or blinking mode of the 7-segment LED, and the stop mode according to the established conditions described above. The stop symbol consisting of is displayed (design variation control means). In other words, the main control program starts the special symbol variation display when the start condition is met after the start condition is met, and then the winning condition is determined when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. A stop symbol corresponding to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a fixed stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is finished and the predetermined stop symbol is fixed. The main control program reads the fixed stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S6504). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S505) and ends the changing process.

  By the way, the fact that the processing flag is 3 indicates that the change display of the special symbol is stopped in the manner of winning the big hit. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value to a situation identification flag for identifying a gaming state in a jackpot game preparation process to be described later together with the process of updating the process flag to 3 in step S6505.

  The main control program uses the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 corresponding to the special symbol that has been variably displayed as described above to display a stop symbol corresponding to the established winning condition. (Stopping symbol control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508) and ends the changing process. In this case, since the main control program is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, the main control program regulates the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. It should be noted that the fact that this processing flag is 0 indicates that the special symbol is in a state where the special symbol has been suspended in a manner that has not been won.

[Big hit game preparation processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the status identification flag is 0 (step S6621). Note that the value of the status identification flag is set to 0 when the processing flag is updated to 3, as described above.

  As described above, this situation identification flag is a flag for identifying the gaming state in the jackpot game preparation process. For example, a situation identification flag of 0 means initial setting, a situation identification flag of 1 means that an explanation interval effect is being performed, and a situation identification flag of 2 means that It means that the game mode determination process is being performed, and that the situation identification flag is 3 means that the jackpot start interval effect is being performed.

  When the big hit game preparation process is executed first, as a result of setting the situation identification flag to 0, the main control program writes and sets the explanation interval effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6622). The main control program transmits the explanation interval effect command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the timer interrupt process executed around every 4 ms in the command transmission process described above. Next, the main control program sets the explanation interval effect timer (step S6623), then sets 1 to the situation identification flag (step S6624), and ends the big hit game preparation process. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is decremented by 1 in the timer subtraction process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms by the main control program.

  Here, the explanation interval effect mentioned above means that after the display effect that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the big hit is not a big hit of a specific type ( That is, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 explains the game procedure until the big hit game is actually started (when the normal type is big hit). When the big hit is a specific type of big hit, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a display effect that the 16-round big hit game is executed in addition to the display effect that the big hit is made.

  By the way, the next processing cycle of the big hit game preparation processing is 4 ms later. If the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 1, as a result of determining in step S621 that the situation identification flag is not 0, the main control program determines whether or not the situation identification flag is 1. Is determined (step S6625). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 1, the main control program determines whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S6626). If the explanation interval effect has not timed up, the main control program ends the jackpot game preparation process. Hereinafter, until the explanation interval effect times out, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and YES in step S6625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 1 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the explanation interval effect timer expires in step S6626, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device assuming that the explanation interval effect has ended (step S6627). Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S6628). If the time reduction function is activated, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S6629).

  On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not activated, the main control program writes and sets the gate effective effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6636). The main control program reads the gate effective effect command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. The peripheral control unit 4140 can recognize that the execution of the gate effective effect described later is permitted with the reception of the gate effective effect command. Further, the main control program sets 2 to the situation identification flag (step S6630), and ends the jackpot game preparation process as described above.

  Here, the gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled after the above-described explanation interval effect is completed (by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is an effect display for notifying the player that the detection of the game ball has been activated.

  In the present embodiment, when winning in the big hit lottery, the start timing of the big hit game can be freely determined by the player's intention. That is, when the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the gate valid effect command, the game control side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a display screen that prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game should be executed by the effect control program. To display. At the same time, the display screen may be displayed and a message may be displayed indicating that it is possible to take some breaks before actually starting the big hit game.

  On the other hand, when the above-described processing flag is 3 and the status identification flag is set to 2, the main control program determines NO in steps S6621 and S6625 in the jackpot game preparation processing in the next cycle, It is determined whether or not the status identification flag is 2 (step S6631). In this case, since 2 is set in the situation identification flag, the main control program performs the following jackpot gaming state determination process (step S6632).

[Big hit game mode decision processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state determination process shown in FIG. 97, and FIG. 104 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game state determination process.

  In the big hit game mode determination process, the main control program is used for determining the big hit game mode when triggered by the distribution detection sensor 2580L detecting the passage of the game ball on the left gate or the distribution detection sensor 2580R on the right gate of the game ball. Get a random value (round number determination random value). The main control program includes the acquired jackpot game mode determination random value (round number determination random value), the type of jackpot flag in a flag ON state (a specific type jackpot flag or a normal type jackpot flag), The execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined based on whether the passed gate is left or right.

  In this big hit game mode determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the delay of the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor, that is, the game ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586. It is determined whether or not (step S6071). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (step S1). S6072).

  When a game ball is detected with a delay in step S6071, the main control program does not determine whether or not the distribution detection sensor 2580L has detected even if the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L. That is, when a game ball is detected in delay in step S6071, the main control program invalidates the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

  In step S6072, if the distribution detection sensor 2580R does not detect that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, the main control program ends the big hit game state determination process and ends the big hit game preparation process. Return to the interrupt process and execute it.

  Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the main control program determines NO in steps S6621 and S625 based on the fact that the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is 2. The process routine is determined, YES is determined in step S6631, YES is determined in step S6071 in the big hit gaming state determination process, and NO is determined in step S6072 is repeated.

  On the other hand, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R in step S6072, the main control program determines that the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, the big hit flag turned on in step S6317 is a specific type. It is determined whether it is a big hit flag (step S6073). Here, if the specific type of big hit flag is ON in step S6073, the main control program determines the big hit game mode with reference to the right gate 2575R of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6074).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6073 that the specific type of big hit flag is not ON (that is, the normal type of big hit flag is ON), the main control program refers to the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. Is determined (step S6075).

  Here, as can be seen by referring to the table A in FIG. 104, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. Is passed (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the big hit game is the same although the mode of the big hit game executed is different ( It is not necessary to be an exact match, as long as the game performance is not impaired.

  When a game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the main control program sets 6% round hit game and 12 round jackpot game to 50% each. The probability is determined. On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the main control program sets 2 rounds of big hit game and 16 rounds of big hit game to 50% each. The probability is determined.

  If no delay is detected in step S6071, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L by the distribution detection sensor 2580L (step S6076).

  If it is not detected in step S6076 that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, if no game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6076 and determines the big hit game mode. The process exits from the process and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and the jackpot game preparation process is terminated, and a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms.

  Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the fact that the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is 2. In step S6625, NO is determined, YES is determined in step S6631, and in the big hit game state determination process, a processing routine is determined in which NO is determined in step S6071 and NO is determined in step S6076.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L in step S6076, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program reads the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S6317. It is determined whether or not the ON jackpot flag is a specific type jackpot flag (step S6077). Here, if the specific type of big hit flag is ON, the main control program determines the big hit game mode with reference to the left gate 2575L of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6078).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6077 that the specific type of big hit flag is not ON (that is, the normal type of big hit flag is ON), the main control program refers to the left gate 2575L of Table A and executes the big hit game. A mode (the number of rounds in this embodiment) is determined (step S6079).

  When the execution mode of the jackpot game (number of rounds in this embodiment) is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 or step S6079, the main control program starts the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6080). . Next, the main control program determines whether or not the probability changing function is in operation when the accessory continuous operation device is operated (step S6081).

  If it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is in operation, the main control program stops the probability variation function in step S6082, and executes step S6083 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is not operating, the main control program directly executes step S6083 while skipping step S6082.

  In step S6083, the main control program sets the operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 (step S6083).

  The operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 is, for example, the maximum number of round games in which the big prize opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game, and game balls can enter the big prize opening 2103 in each round game. The opening mode of the big prize opening 2103 in the big hit game, such as the upper limit number (for example, nine) to be taken and the opening / closing operation restriction time of the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B in each round game, is set.

  Next, the main control program is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is already being performed. A flag, etc. are set (step S6084).

  Although the details will be described later, the main control program transmits the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the above-described command transmission processing (see FIG. 570). Thus, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as the effect associated with the determined round number through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Will come to be.

  Thus, even if the explanation interval effect timer has timed up, the main control program will not play a big hit game unless it detects the passing of a game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R). The progress is stopped and the next process is not executed in the big hit game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined that a big hit is determined in the process of step S6315 and the condition device is activated (step S6604), the main control program does not proceed with the big hit game as it is, but instead the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate). Until the passing of the game ball to 2575R) is detected (steps S6072 and S6076), the big hit game is stopped.

  As described above, here, if the player who touches the display screen of FIG. 75 or FIG. 76 does not fire the game ball to the distribution unit 2550 by the player's intention (right hit), the big hit game Because it does not start, it is easy to notice that a message that the player can take a break before the start of the big hit game is displayed, and to make the player recognize the content of the message more reliably Can do. Further, as a display timing, when the player is enthusiastic about the game, the game can be temporarily interrupted by the player's intention, and a break can be taken in this state or the player can go to the toilet.

  Thereafter, when the game ball is fired to the sorting unit 2550 by the player's intention, the main control program detects the game ball by the sorting sensor 2580L or the sorting sensor 2580R, and based on this, the big hit game Is canceled in step S6072, or YES is determined in step S6076, and one of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 is executed, thereby The execution mode (number of rounds) of the game can be determined, and the jackpot game in the determined execution mode can be started. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and the moment of starting the jackpot game is not overlooked, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  Next, the main control program sets a jackpot start interval effect command (step S6085), sets a jackpot start interval effect timer to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), and sets a status identification flag to 3 (step S6087). ), The jackpot game mode determination process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process and executed, and the jackpot game preparation process is terminated and a timer interrupt process is performed every 4 ms. This big hit start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side from when the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening and closing of the opening and closing device 2106 is started. This is a display effect indicating that a big hit game is started.

  The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 570). Thereby, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect display indicating that the big hit game is started is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  By the way, according to steps S6621 to S6629, the main control program continues to operate the time reduction function until the explanation interval effect time elapses in a series of lottery processes for execution of the big hit game. In other words, despite the fact that the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that it is a big hit, the time reduction function is activated by deferring the start of operation of the condition device while the explanation interval effect is being performed. In this case, during the execution of the explanation interval effect, the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2102 is facilitated.

  When the above-described jackpot game mode determination process is completed, the processing flag is 3, and as a result of setting the status identification flag to 3, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next period of 4 ms, the main control program determines NO in step S6621. In step S6625, NO is determined, NO is determined in step S6631, the process proceeds to step S6633, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 is timed up (step S633).

  If the jackpot start interval effect has not timed out, the main control program determines NO in step S6633, hunts the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine to execute it. Hereinafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and determines YES in step S625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 3 of the situation identification flag until the jackpot start interval effect times out. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the jackpot start interval effect ends due to time up, the main control program determines YES in step S633, and updates the processing flag to 4 assuming that the jackpot start interval effect has ended (step S6634). Next, the main control program sets the status identification flag to 0 and returns it to the initial value (step S 6635), ends the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine for execution.

[Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is 4 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  In the jackpot game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the big prize opening 2103 is being opened, the main control program determines whether the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 has reached the opening / closing operation limit time set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). If it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed, the main control program closes the special winning opening 2103 by closing the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program does not stop the big prize opening 2103 after the big prize opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the ball is greater than or equal to the upper limit (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed in step S6802 and the number of game balls received in the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number in step S6803, the main control program The jackpot game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the main control program determines that the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened (number of round games) by the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B is the above step S6803 (FIG. 103), it is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in step S805 has been reached. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program activates the opening / closing members 2106 according to the winning conditions established as described above, and opens the corresponding big prize opening 2103 (step S6806), and the big hit game The process ends.

  When the opening / closing member 2106 is thus operated to open the special winning opening 2103, the main control program, for example, in accordance with a predetermined opening / closing pattern triggered by the transition to the first special game state, for example, the opening / closing member 2106. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is permitted by accepting game balls to the grand prize winning opening 2103 and then transitioned from the first special gaming state to another gaming state. By doing so, the reception of the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 is suppressed (movable piece opening / closing control means). Here, the expression “suppressing the acceptance of game balls” means that, although the acceptance of game balls to the big prize opening 2103 is originally restricted, for example, by a physical method, This is because the opening / closing member 2106, which should be in a closed state in which it is difficult to receive the ball, is forcibly opened so that the game ball can be received.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program confirms that the winning condition has been established by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state is shifted to a state in which execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2106 executed as a condition is restricted. That is, in this case, the main control program is stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in, for example, step S6317 (see FIG. 99) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. Based on the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807). Then, the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, the main control program determines whether or not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). In other words, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not a gaming state (probability variation state) in which a winning condition is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be established. (Winning probability control means). The main control program sets the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and also sets a transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a game state determined to be transferred next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program makes a transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means), and determines the gaming state that is determined to be transitioned next. As a command to represent, the migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92).

  That is, if the main control program determines in step S6808 that the probability variation function is not selected, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without activating both the probability variation function and the time shortening function (step S6808). S6811). On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning type that activates the probability variation function, the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the winning condition is established is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be satisfied. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to a probability variation state that is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of variation display times. While the probability variation state is continued while the variation is displayed, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, the main control program activates the time reduction function (step S6810), and then stops the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time reduction function is activated, the main control program selects each hourly time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group in which the variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol. Corresponding to the length of the variation pattern determined from each hourly variation pattern table, the variation time value of the special symbol is set to the timer shorter than the prescribed variation time value (shortening function control means) . The main control program writes a transfer destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a gaming state that is determined to be transferred next, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92). You may make it transmit. At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second start port 2102 according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations is reached. The game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in a state where it can be easily received by the second starting port 2102. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812) and ends the big hit game processing.

  In this way, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the big prize opening 2103 in the opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds determined in advance in step 805 is reached. Instructed for a prize ball movement according to the number of game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 in the open state.

[12. Production control]
The above-described effect control program analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (command receiving means) in the received command analysis processing described above (command receiving means). In the case of a command, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled along the variation pattern corresponding to this variation pattern command (the pattern command included in), and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has the left, middle, After the right decorative design is variably displayed over the variable time, three decorative stop symbols simulating the special design stop symbol are displayed. In addition, the effect control program controls various decorative boards (to be described later) of the game board 4 and lights and blinks the variable display lamps 1701, 1702, and 1703 in conjunction with the above-described variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. Alternatively, the gradation state is variably displayed, and then the variability display is stopped in order. Thereafter, the effect control program causes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a decoration stop symbol corresponding to the winning information related to the jackpot based on the winning information command included in the variation pattern command on the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. At this time, the effect control program controls various decorative boards of the game board 4 and performs so-called variable display on the 7-segment display device 1800 using the above-described variable display lamps 1701, 1702, and 1703, so-called. The number of decorative symbols, which are the numbers of the special symbols, are displayed in a variable manner using the 7-segment display, and then the stop symbols of the above-described variable display lamps 1701, 1702, 1703 are decoratively imitated. Display the decoration stop symbol.

[12-1. Precedence judgment processing on peripheral control board side]
The effect control program analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the above-described received command analysis processing (command receiving means), and the command is a special symbol 1 stored command or special command. When it is a symbol 2 storage command, the reception of this command triggers a start hold display mode that implies a lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command. The panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) leads out (start-up hold control means).

  In other words, when the received command is a special symbol memory pre-reading effect command (special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command or special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command), the effect control program reads the pre-read included in the special symbol memory pre-reading effect command. Based on the information (for example, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, information suggesting the type of jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 is acquired. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is caused to derive a start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start storage information corresponding to the stored prefetch effect command (start hold control means).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is received, the effect control program displays “starting hold display mode (for example,“ normal display ”as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to expect a big hit) (Exemplary “hold display mode”) from the beginning or from the middle to a special start hold display mode (for example, “gekiatsu hold display mode” is illustrated as a hold display mode that makes it very easy for the player to hold a big hit expectation) Reservation pre-reading control is executed that is replaced and led to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (hold pre-reading control means). Hereinafter, such a function is referred to as a “hold prefetch control function”.

[12-2. Panel common image display]
Here, as a general pachinko machine, a main liquid crystal display device is provided on a game board, and a special symbol is variably displayed every time a game ball is received at a start port. On the main liquid crystal display device, There are some which display a decorative design that variably displays a special design to be displayed in a variable manner and perform an effect display by causing a character in line with the theme of the gaming machine to appear. On the other hand, there are some recent pachinko machines in which a sub liquid crystal display device is further provided on the game board. In such a recent pachinko machine, even when displaying the screens of substantially the same mode on the main liquid crystal display device and the sub liquid crystal display device described above, since the screen sizes thereof are different, each image data is nonvolatile. It was necessary to prepare the video memory separately (hereinafter also referred to as “character ROM”). For this reason, in such a recent pachinko machine, the storage capacity required for the character ROM is likely to be large compared to a general game machine equipped with only the main liquid crystal display device, and other images are relatively free. It seems that there is a risk of squeezing the storage capacity for storing data.

  However, in the present embodiment, the VDP 4160a (production control means) with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 has different display sizes from the size-converted image data read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. One frame whose display size is changed to match the display area of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 (one display means) and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (at least one of the other display means) Are successively generated (size adjusting means). The built-in sound source VDP 4160a sequentially outputs the generated drawing data for one frame to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 for each timer interruption, respectively. Common images having different display sizes are displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

  In this way, even if a common image having a different display size is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, one size conversion is performed on the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. Since it is sufficient to prepare image data, the storage capacity required for the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b can be reduced as much as possible.

  In order to display the common images having different display sizes on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (corresponding to one display means) and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (corresponding to at least one other display means), respectively. As a specific configuration, first, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a uses the size-converted image data stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (effect control storage means) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. As shown in (A), the display size of the common image is changed while maintaining the aspect ratio so as to substantially match the first width W1 in the horizontal direction of the first display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. First drawing data for forming a main panel image as the first common image is generated. At the same time, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a maintains the aspect ratio while maintaining the first width W1 in the horizontal direction of the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means). The display size of the common image is set so that the second width W2 in the horizontal direction of the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) as shown in FIG. Second drawing data for forming a touch panel image as the changed second common image is generated (size adjusting means).

  The built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs the first drawing data generated as described above to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and displays the first common image in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. (First common image control means).

  By the way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has at least one start in the decoration hold display area (specific area) which is a part of the lower part in the vertical direction in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means). A decoration hold display mode is derived in correspondence with the derived hold display mode in such a manner that each stored information can be specified (decoration hold display control means). As this decoration hold display mode, for example, when four pieces of start memory information are already stored in the start memory information storage area, hold balls A, B, C, and D as illustrated can be exemplified.

  When the touch panel image is displayed as the second common image in the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a displays the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the touch panel images. A part of the touch panel image is displayed on the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 except for the part corresponding to the decoration hold display area (specific area) in the area (second common image control means).

  In this way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a displays the at least one start-up storage information in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on one size-converted image data stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. A main panel image (first common image) that includes a decoration holding display area for visually expressing a decoration holding display mode that can be derived in a mode that can be specified, and has a similar shape to the above-described common image Is displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the decoration hold display area located below the main panel image is removed from the main panel image and the display size is changed (for example, reduced) ( The second common image) is displayed. As a result, as described above, not only the storage capacity required for the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b can be reduced as much as possible, but also the decoration hold display area can be displayed only in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device can be enjoyed through the operation surface of the touch panel 246 while the game is sufficiently enjoyed without excessively gazing at the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The display contents of the display area 244 can be enjoyed.

[12-3. Game specification browsing function]
[12-3-1. Booklet information display]
By the way, in general, a player can read a game machine related information magazine in advance for a game machine familiar to him / her, while he / she encounters a new game machine unfamiliar to him / her. As an information source for grasping the specifications of the machine, it is possible to refer to a booklet that is provided by the game machine manufacturer and prepared in the game hall before the game starts. In recent years, gaming machines have a gaming characteristic characterized by each model (see the above-mentioned references). By referring to such a booklet, the player can easily grasp the outline of the gaming specifications of the model. (Hereinafter, such a current situation is also referred to as “predetermined background”). The related information magazine as described above is not an information source that can be surely obtained because the player has to go to the store for purchase one by one. On the other hand, the booklet has a limited number of copies provided by a gaming machine manufacturing company, and is not necessarily available to all desired players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the configuration of the storage area of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (effect control storage means) is shown in FIG. As a specified storage area fixedly secured in a space from a specified start address to a specified end address, separately from the effect data area 4160ba in which the effect data used for controlling the image is stored in advance. An information data area 4160bb is formed.

  In this model information data area 4160bb, a plurality of page unit model information data for displaying the model information of the model (hereinafter referred to as “booklet information”) as a plurality of pages as an example of information relating to game contents is specified as described above. Are stored in advance from a prescribed start address in the storage area. In the present embodiment, all the page unit model information data is collectively referred to as “model information data”. The blank area 4160bc represents the remaining space that is not filled with the data when the data is stored in the storage area of the effect data area 4160ba.

  In the present embodiment, as such model information data, for example, data for displaying booklet information including a description of at least one of a gaming method and a gaming specification regarding a specific model of a pachinko machine divided into a plurality of pages is displayed. Can be mentioned. Here, for example, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 of this embodiment is illustrated as the model A, while the pachinko machine provided with another game board is illustrated as the model B. In any of these models, model information data unique to each model is stored in a space extending from the top address (corresponding to the “start address” described above) of the model information data area 4160ba to the specified end address.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, for example, in a state where the game is not continued, the effect control program is triggered by the detection of the specified contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact state detection means), and the liquid crystal and sound control unit The specified start address and the specified end address of the storage area of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b are fixedly designated in the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of 4160, and data for a specified capacity is uniformly received from the model information data area 4160bb. Read (model information data control means). The read data includes model information data as the model information data described above. The reason why the data having the prescribed capacity is read out in this way is to enable the method to be similarly applied to other models without correcting the program code.

  The effect control program causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate specific page drawing data as drawing data corresponding to a specific page among a plurality of pages from the model information data read as described above, and is not illustrated. Store in frame memory. When the drawing data is stored in the frame memory, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a further synchronizes with the V blank signal output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and displays the specific page drawing data in the frame memory on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. Output to the device 244.

  Then, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 executes drawing processing based on the inputted drawing data in synchronization with the V blank signal received from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, and displays the corresponding frame in the display area. In this way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a first displays an introduction page representing a model theme of “FIRE DYNAMITE KING” as a specific page in the booklet information as information about game content, for example, as shown in FIG. (Specific page drawing control means).

  In this way, even if a player encounters an unknown game machine in a game hall where no booklet with explanations of game methods and game specifications is installed at all, or a sufficiently large number is not installed. Because, instead of referring to the booklet, you can browse the page explaining the outline of the overall game flow for the unknown gaming machine, so it is sufficient to know the gaming specifications accurately without losing the gaming method. You can enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine development company, it is easy for the player to understand the gaming method and the gaming specification intended by the gaming machine developer, so that the gaming specifications are somewhat complicated or the gaming method is rare. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the game according to the game specifications in accordance with the intended game method.

  On the other hand, as a game hall, there is no need to newly prepare a corresponding booklet for each type of game machine replaced at an island facility where the frequency of replacement of game machines tends to be high every day. Not only can the maintenance work be reduced, but the reduced amount of the game hall clerk can engage in other work.

  Incidentally, the model information data described above is composed of a set of page unit model information data 4610za to 4610zz corresponding to a plurality of pages, as shown in FIG. 67A, and each page unit model information data. In 4610za to 4610zz, prescribed page break information 4160z arranged from the prescribed start address for each page is provided at the head. As shown in FIG. 67B, the page break information 4160z includes, for example, production type information 4160za, previous page start address 4160zb, and next page start address 4160zc of 2 bytes each from the start address of each page. . This effect type information is information relating to the type of effect content described in each corresponding page, and represents information such as “reach effect”, for example. The previous page start address 4160zb, when there is a previous page of the currently displayed page among a plurality of pages, specifies the position of the storage area storing the page unit model information data used for displaying the previous page Represents the start address. On the other hand, the next page start address 4160zc indicates the position of the storage area in which the page unit model information data used for displaying the next page is stored when there is a next page of the page currently displayed among the plurality of pages. It represents the specified starting address.

  In such a configuration, the production control program has the model information data corresponding to each model (and the plurality of page unit model information constituting the model) over the specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address. Data). That is, the effect control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the models are different. On the other hand, the effect control program reads each page unit model information data of each page corresponding to each model over a specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address. That is, the effect control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the models are different.

  As described above, in the state where the introduction page (hereinafter referred to as “the current page”) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the effect control program is predetermined on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 as shown in FIG. Triggered when the contact state sliding from the lower left to the upper right is detected as an opportunity, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is turned to the predetermined direction, for example, the page from the left to the right along the sliding contact state. Based on the page break information 4160 of the page, page unit model information data is read from the next page start address 4160zc included in the page over the space of the specified unit capacity, and the page model information for one page to be displayed next. Page drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “next page drawing data”) is generated from the data, and this next page is generated. Writes drawing data into the frame memory described above, in synchronism with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a page explaining the outline of the overall game flow is displayed as the next page of the booklet information based on the next page drawing data as shown in FIG. The

  On the other hand, in the state where the page explaining the outline of the overall game flow (referred to as “this page” at the present time) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as described above, , When the contact state sliding from right to left, for example, from right to left is detected, the page break information of this page when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is turned in the predetermined direction along the slide contact state Based on 4160z, page unit model information data is read from the previous page start address 4160zb included in this area over a space of a prescribed unit capacity, and the page model information data for one page to be displayed retroactively. Drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “previous page drawing data”) is generated, and the previous page drawing data is generated. Writing data to the frame memory described above, in synchronism with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, the upper platen side liquid crystal display device 244 returns to the page representing the model theme and displays it as the previous page of the booklet information based on the previous page drawing data.

[12-3-2. Automatic page display]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player has to operate the firing handle with one hand to launch the game ball, so the booklet page must be touched only with the other hand. In many cases, the player proceeds to the next game before reaching the desired page on which the explanation corresponding to the progress of the game is described.

  In order to eliminate such inconvenience, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program is added to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Thus, the booklet information composed of a plurality of pages is displayed, and then a specific page corresponding to the progress of the game is automatically displayed from among the plurality of pages constituting the booklet information.

  In order to exert such a function, the model information data prepared in advance in the model information data area 4160bb of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b includes page break information 4160z for each page as shown in FIG. 67 (B). In addition to the next page start address and the previous page start address, production type information corresponding to the description content of the current page is included as described above. As the effect type information, for example, for the page unit model information data used to display the page including the commentary contents regarding the reach effect, the page break information 4160z located at the start address is “reach effect”. The information shown can be mentioned.

  Specifically, the production control program, for example, as an example of the production condition, the reach condition for executing the reach production (specific production operation) described above or a specific reach condition (production condition) among the reach conditions. As a trigger (effect lottery means), “reach effect” among the effect type information of the page break information 4160z of the plurality of page unit model information data constituting the model information data uniformly read as described above. The page unit model information data corresponding to is searched (model information data control means). That is, the effect control program finds page unit model information data associated with the established reach condition among the plurality of page unit model information data in the model information data used for displaying the plurality of pages.

  Next, the production control program generates drawing data from the page unit model information data and outputs it to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). As an example of the specific rendering operation, as a specific page related to the reach rendering, for example, a comment page regarding the reach rendering as shown in FIG. 112 is automatically displayed (page automatic display control means). It should be noted that the specific page to be automatically displayed in this way is not limited to the reach effect as described above, but may be related to other effect operations or other information.

  In this embodiment, the player basically becomes easy to pay attention to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that performs the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the reach effect is an example of the effect operation according to the progress of the game. Is executed, an explanation regarding the reach effect as the effect operation is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). Therefore, even a player who is playing with an unfamiliar pachinko machine 1 can refer to the explanation corresponding to the progress of an unfamiliar game at an appropriate timing without impairing the visibility of the decorative symbol variation display. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game while accurately grasping the original game performance. In addition, the player can fully enjoy the gameability after accurately understanding the game specifications intended by the developer of the game machine one by one along the progress of the game.

[12-3-3. Standing role demonstration]
By the way, in general, a recent gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board characterized according to a theme set for each model, and when a game is started, a movable accessory provided on the gaming board is used. It is rarely activated suddenly to surprise the player so that the player's interest is not exhausted (see above reference). Thus, even in a gaming machine having a movable decoration body 3250 on a gaming board, for example, during a demonstration production, it is common that a movable accessory is stored. For this reason, the operating mode of the movable body is difficult to imagine for visitors who are searching for the desired pachinko machine and patrol the aisle of the game hall. Often it was difficult to be psychic about trying.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program first receives a command (command) output by the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), and the game ball is received from the main control board 4100 to the start port 2101. A state in which a command (in this case, a start opening winning command (start opening winning command) is illustrated) is not received (hereinafter referred to as a non-game state) continues for about 30 seconds (a specified period). Then, this is detected (non-game state detecting means). The production control program may be based on whether or not another command is received to detect the non-game state.

  Next, the production control program executes the origin return program for executing the origin return process described above (hereinafter simply referred to as “origin”) when such a non-game state continues for the specified period. The movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) is actuated in a prescribed manner (demonstration control means).

  In this way, even if a new control is not added by using the existing origin return process, a visitor who is tricking the aisle of the game hall can, for example, change the behavior of the movable accessory that characterizes game play. In order to be blessed with the opportunity to come in contact, before the game, you will experience the operating mode of the movable actors characterized in this way, and the operating mode of such mobile actors will be implemented in any situation in the actual game It will be easy to reach the psychology of trying to start the game.

  Further, the effect control program turns on the power when the movable decoration body 3250 is actuated in the specified operation mode in the above-described origin return process, when a new start opening command (start prize command) is received. After the time process is interrupted, a process of moving the movable decorative body 3250 from the interrupted position to the specified storage position (hereinafter, also referred to as “origin return process after the demonstration interruption”) is executed (control means after the demonstration interruption) ).

  By the way, under the above-described predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specifications on the surface by referring to the booklet. For example, regarding the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250 It was difficult to grasp unless the game was actually started, and it was difficult to convey the game using the movable decorative body 3250.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, liquid crystal and sound are triggered when a contact state (hereinafter referred to as “first prescribed contact state”) on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) of the touch unit 220B is detected. The upper unit side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) on the touch unit 220B based on the model information data uniformly read from the model information data storage area 4160bb (specified storage area) of the control ROM 4160b (production control storage means). In addition, after displaying information related to the game viewed by the player in place of the booklet, the specific content related to the movable decorative body 3250 is displayed as a part of the information related to the game in the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. A contact at a part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the displayed position. Triggered by the state (hereinafter referred to as "contact with the second defined") is detected, it actuates the movable decorative body 3250 (the movable won game) in behavior corresponding to a specific content being the display.

  Specifically, the presentation control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb as described above (model information data control means), and a plurality of page unit model information data included in the read model information data. The drawing data is generated in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from the specific page unit model information data and is output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is specified among the plurality of pages described above. A page related to the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “notice effect page”) as shown in FIG. 111 is displayed (specific page display control means).

  In this notice effect page, regarding the notice effect using the character body of the bomb king named “Mite-kun”, for example, it is shown that the degree of expectation to the big hit changes depending on the color, and the behavior of the character object Is represented in a plane. When this character is red, it is suggested that one of the four behaviors of “Normal”, “Rolling”, “Rocket” and “Monster” is selected and displayed on this notice effect page. ing. The four types of icons indicating these behavior modes include an icon 246 </ b> Z representing the “rolling” behavior.

  Thus, a visitor of the game hall that touches the notice effect page displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B is interested in the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250, for example, and is controlled by the control of the effect control program. Touching an icon 246Z that is visible through the operation surface of the touch panel 246 in the notice effect page (specific page) displayed in the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means).

  Then, in the effect control program, an icon 246Z representing a specific behavior is displayed as a specific content related to the movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) as a part of the information related to the game content in such a notice effect page. The origin return process may be executed as described above when the specified contact state is detected on the part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the present position. Instead, for example, as a specific behavior intended by the displayed icon 246Z, a drive signal for rotating the movable ornament 3250 in one direction is given to a motor (not shown), or the movable ornament 3250 The driving signal for rotating in the direction is repeatedly applied to a motor (not shown), and the rolling operation of the movable decorative body 3250 is performed as a specified operation mode. It is an aspect to repeat (hereinafter referred to as "rolling mode") (simulation operation control means).

  As a specific method for realizing such a mode of repeating the reeling of the movable decorative body 3250, the following method is employed in the present embodiment. First, the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores the various schedule data described above stores specific schedule data corresponding to the effect pattern that is operated in a manner in which the movable decorative body 3250 is repeatedly rolled.

  The effect control program is an effect pattern for operating in a mode (hereinafter referred to as a “rolling mode”) of repeating the rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 among a plurality of schedule data respectively corresponding to a plurality of performance patterns, for example, from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Select and read specific schedule data corresponding to. As described above, the production control program is triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state on the contact surface covering the icon 246Z corresponding to the movable ornament 3250, according to the selected specific schedule data. Although the effect control is executed by driving a motor (not shown) for driving the body 3250, other effects for driving the effect device (speaker, etc.) other than the movable decorative body 3250 in the specific schedule data at this time. Other schedule data used for the control is masked (schedule mask means), and the specific actor performance schedule data used for the remaining production control is extracted.

  The effect control program outputs a drive signal to the motor via a drive mechanism (not shown) in accordance with the specific accessory performance schedule data used for the remaining effect control. Then, the movable decorative body 3250 is operated in a manner of repeating rolling horizontally in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 115 by the action of a driving mechanism (not shown).

  In this way, if the booklet described above is not available, or if the booklet is available and the outline of the game specifications can be grasped by the visitor of the game hall, for example, what operating mode the movable decorative body 3250 actually has Even if it is difficult to grasp whether or not the game is not actually started, the game can be started after the visitors of the game hall experience the operating mode of the movable decorative body 3250.

[12-3-4. Mini-game production]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 can play a mini game as a special game without being based on commands from the main control board 4100 separately from the effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100. A mini game is different from a pachinko game, and is a game in which players can compete for their own skills, such as a puzzle game, for example. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs processing for the mini game based on the input to the touch panel 246 of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and displays the game moving image and the processing result on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Peripheral control MPU 4140a imposes a limit on the execution of the mini-game within a range that does not impair the player's willingness to play the mini-game in order to avoid the influence on the pachinko game, that is, the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. . As this restriction, for example, as described later, there is a case where a mini game cannot be performed unless a player's pachinko game is performed and / or a mini game cannot be performed unless a predetermined time has passed. Hereinafter, control related to the mini-game of the peripheral control MPU 4140a will be described.

  In the present embodiment, various effect control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and the effect operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, various data The peripheral control ROM 4150b described as storing effect data such as various control data and various schedule data includes a storage area for storing the effect control program, and another storage area in addition to the storage area for the various effect control data. As another example, a special storage area for storing the mini game control program and the mini game control data may be provided separately. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may access the storage area of the mini game control program and the storage area of the mini game control data without using the effect control program and the effect data when performing the mini game. Characters and sprite data for the mini game and sound source data for the mini game are stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can be operated separately as a gaming machine, such as a smartphone or a consumer game machine, while being a gaming machine using a gaming medium.

  FIG. 116 shows a control block diagram according to the control program of the peripheral control ROM 4150b. The control block based on the control program in the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes an effect control unit 4151a and a mini game control unit 4151b, and the effect control unit 4151a controls the effect operation of the frame side mechanism (lamp, motor, speaker, etc.). The frame side mechanism effect control unit 4151a-1, the game board side mechanism effect control unit 4151a-2 for controlling the effect operation of the game board side mechanism (lamp, motor, etc.), and the image effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device are controlled. A game board side liquid crystal display device effect control unit 5141a-3, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device effect control unit 4151a-4 that controls the image of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device and the vibration of the vibration exciter, and is configured to be a mini The game control unit 4151a includes one or a plurality of control units such as a mini game 1 (4151a-1), a mini game 2 (4151a-2), and so on. . The frame side mechanism effect control unit 4151a-1, the upper plate side liquid crystal device effect control unit 4151A-4, and the mini game control unit 5141b may have common specifications for different types of game boards. The effect related to the lottery by entering the game ball start opening is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a executing the control program (4165A) of the game board side liquid crystal display device effect control unit 4151a, etc. The game is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a executing the control programs of the upper plate side liquid crystal display control effect control unit 4151a-4 and the mini game control unit 4151b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the effect display control process of the upper liquid crystal display device 246 in accordance with the effect control program after the power is turned on. Similar to the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 displays effects related to effects displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 during the special symbol variation period. The upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 is in a standby state except during the special symbol change period, and in the standby state, as shown in FIG. When the player selects a desired item, processing of the selected item is started. In this embodiment, a mini game is provided as one of the items.

  Next, the mini game process in the standby state of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the standby process of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a menu item on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 (S11600). Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the mini game execution restriction condition is successful. As a mini game execution restriction condition, it is first determined whether or not there is a credit that enables the mini game (S11602). One credit is possible with one credit. The number of credits is stored in a predetermined area of the peripheral control RAM 4150d. The peripheral control MPU 4140a adds one credit number stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150d every time the special symbol changes twice. The peripheral control RAM 4150d subtracts one credit number every time a mini game is played. Therefore, credit is required to play a mini game, and a player must play a game using a game ball for credit.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a affirms that there is one or more credits, it determines whether or not the current time is within a range (allowable time) in which the mini-game is allowed (S11604). In the present embodiment, for example, a mini-game can be made within a range from 22:00 to 23:00 just before closing a hall that operates a gaming machine. The background for limiting the mini-game in this way will be described. When playing games with friends and one person is forced to wait for the other game to end, often the person who has finished the game has time or does not want to In spite of this, the game was forced to continue and spend more money than planned. In this case, it is possible to solve these problems by allowing the player who has finished the game to use the mini game by using the credit, but on the other hand, without playing the game using the game medium. Occupying the gaming machine may reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  However, when the player closes the hall, even if the player occupies the game table for the mini-game, the operation rate is not substantially reduced. Therefore, although the time limit described above is imposed, this is an example, and the content of the time limit may be changed as appropriate on the hall side. Since the peripheral control board 4140 includes the RTC 4165a, the current time for limiting the execution of the mini game can be known. Note that time management for mini game execution restriction may be performed by measuring the elapsed time after power-on of the gaming machine.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a affirms that the current time is within the range that allows the mini game to be played, all items including the mini game item are displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 246 (S11606). Next, when the player selects a mini game item (Yes in S11608), the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts a mini game (S11610). As one of this type of mini game, there is a puzzle game shown in FIGS. In this puzzle game, when two mahjong tiles (the same for carta, playing cards, and flower cards) are stacked, if you select two tiles with the same design using the touch panel, the images of the two tiles disappear. (FIGS. 119 and 120). The game is cleared (success of the puzzle game) when all the images of the kites disappear, but the game is over when the time limit elapses before that. By competing for the time until the game is cleared, multiple players can compete for superiority or inferiority of individual skills.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the above-described puzzle game every time there is an operation from the player, and determines whether or not the game is cleared (S11614). If the determination is affirmed, the process returns to the menu display process (S11600) in step S11600. If the determination in S11616 is negative, it is determined whether the time limit has elapsed (S11616). If this determination is negative, the process returns to S11612 to continue the mini game. If the time limit has elapsed, the mini game is forcibly terminated halfway and the process returns to S11600. The peripheral control MPU 4140a decrements the remaining number of credits by a mini game and updates the remaining number of credits. The peripheral control MPU 4140a notifies the player of the number of remaining credits when, for example, a mini game item is selected.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that there is no credit (determination of S11602 is negative) or the time is not within the allowable range (determination of S11604 is negative) in the above-described processing, items other than the mini game item are displayed (S11618). . In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4140a keeps the player from knowing the items of the mini game until the credits are accumulated and until the permissible time, so that the player can concentrate on the game using the game ball (mini). Game access restriction means). Since the player does not select a mini game item, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not access the mini game program area and the mini game control data area. On the other hand, the above-described booklet items and the like are not affected by credit or time limit, and when the upper liquid crystal display device 246 is in a standby state, the upper plate of the peripheral control ROM 4150b is selected by the player. The side liquid crystal display device effect control unit 4151a-4 accesses the model information data area 4160bb and the like of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (effect control storage means). When the player selects an item other than the mini game (S11620, when the item of the mini game is not displayed (S11608 is determined to be negative)), the selected item is processed (S11622) and the process returns. If no item is selected, the menu screen is displayed as it is.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the special figure variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 when controlling the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 in the standby state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 from the standby state to the effect state. FIG. 121 is a flowchart for this purpose. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the special figure variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the flowchart by interrupt processing. The peripheral control MPU 4140a checks the status flag of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 in a predetermined area of the peripheral control RAM 4150d to check whether the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 is in a standby state (S11700). If the determination is affirmative, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops the menu item processing flowchart of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 (S11703), and temporarily stores the control data in a predetermined area of the peripheral control RAM 4150d.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines an effect pattern of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 with reference to a special figure variation pattern command from the main control board 4100 (S11702), and determines the effect pattern determined during the variation of the special symbol. Execute (S11704). When the change of the special symbol is finished, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a hold (S11706). If there is a hold, the peripheral liquid crystal display device 246 is not returned to the standby state, and S11702. When the process shifts to and digests the hold, the effect pattern of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 is determined based on various commands such as a special symbol variation pattern command (S11704).

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a no longer holds (No in S11706), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not it is necessary to restart the flowchart of the menu item processing of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 246 once stopped (S11708). The peripheral control MPU 4140a normally affirms this determination and restarts the flowchart of FIG. 116 with reference to the control data saved and stored in a predetermined area of the peripheral control RAM 4150d (S11710). Therefore, when a game ball is launched during the mini game and enters the start port, the mini game is interrupted, and a related video related to the effect video of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246. However, when the effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is finished, the mini game process is resumed from the interrupted state. The restart of the mini game process may be performed from the menu display (S11600) of the above-described flowchart, and the peripheral control RAM 4150d continues to measure the time limit even if the mini game process is interrupted. If it is within, the mini-game process may be resumed from the interrupted state, and from the menu display when the time limit is exceeded.

  116 to 121 described above, the gaming machine is allowed to operate independently as a game machine such as a home game machine, and the operation rate of the gaming machine is suppressed. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game itself as a game machine.

[12-3-5. Advance notice]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment further allows the player to perform an effect in which the peripheral control MPU 4140a suggests or notifies the lottery result by the main control board 4100 on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246. Is provided, and a player participation type notice means for allowing the player to unravel the lottery result by himself / herself is provided. The peripheral control MPU 4140a asks the player for an advanced operation with respect to the operating means at the time of the notice effect, and changes the progress of the notice effect according to the result of the player's operation such as whether the player's operation is good or not. If the player's operation is good, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a notice effect so that the player can confirm the symbol, but if the player's operation is not enough, the peripheral control MPU 4140a Can make it difficult or impossible to confirm the jackpot symbol.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform a player's operation request on the above-described upper liquid crystal display device 246, for example, during a notice effect. Since the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the player's input to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 with the touch panel 246 described above, it is possible to make the player's input sophisticated and diversified. It is also possible to determine whether the person's input mode is good or not. Input to the touch panel 246 is not restricted in input position or direction, and input to a predetermined area is possible.

  Since the touch panel 246 is formed on substantially the entire display screen of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the player can perform a touch operation on the touch panel 246 in a desired direction of two-dimensional coordinates. The notification that prompts the player to input to the touch panel may be performed by displaying a touch panel icon on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The operation mode required of the player includes a plurality of patterns for the operation direction with respect to the touch panel. For example, as shown in FIG. 122, the arrow icon (1) has a direction from right to left. In addition, the direction from left to right, the direction between the top and bottom (2), the slanted upper right and the like (3), the plurality of directions (4) that fold back to the left and return to the right (4), and the object line (5) Patterns such as a direction having an inflection point, such as ◯, △, □, heart, and ☆, and a scratch direction (6) are included in the operation modes required by the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a continuously samples the input direction and the input amount (vector) from the start of input to the end thereof by continuously sampling the coordinates of the player's contact input target with respect to the touch panel of the upper side liquid crystal display device 244. Can be obtained. Even if the direction of input to the touch panel changes midway, a change in the direction of input can be detected. Peripheral control MPU 4140a extracts the feature and mode of the operation from the result of the input operation on the touch panel of the player, and compares it with the mode of operation of the instructed content. Since the peripheral control MPU 4140a can extract the characteristics of the operation including the direction of the operation by operating the touch panel, it can determine whether or not the operation by the player has been performed. The operation direction by the player on the touch panel can be a desired direction on a two-dimensional coordinate, and such a free operation direction cannot be realized with a conventional effect button or effect dial. The operation direction of the effect button is limited to the pressing direction of the button, and the operation direction of the effect dial is limited to the rotation direction of the dial. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that changes the display effect depending on the behavior of the player's arm on the front of the game board, but the arm is detected only by detecting the behavior of the arm using a photosensor. It was not possible to detect up to the direction of movement. According to the touch panel, an input operation capable of following or responding to an operation is instructed in any direction.

  The mode of operation to be instructed can include not only the direction but also the operation amount and operation speed. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may display a text such as “Take a touch panel quickly from right to left long” on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. The peripheral control MPU 4140a can detect a change in input mode such as a change in input direction and a change in input speed during the input period with high accuracy by shortening the sampling interval for the input to the touch panel. The order of operations can be added to the operation instructions. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display such as “1. ☆, 2. ○, 3. □” on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player inputs the shapes specified in this order on the touch panel. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can determine the input order and correct the player's input.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines by providing a predetermined threshold when comparing whether the player's operation mode on the touch panel is in accordance with an instruction or an assumed operation mode, in other words, matching. May be. Even if the player's operation mode does not completely match the required operation mode, the player's operation on the touch panel 246 can be made appropriate if it is included within this threshold. . For example, if the requested operation is a right-to-left operation on the touch panel, or if the operation on the touch panel is an input between right-to-left and up-and-down, it is assumed that the direction of the operation by the player is different. The user's operation is determined to be inappropriate. On the other hand, even if the operation on the touch panel is performed slightly obliquely from right to left, if the operation is within the allowable range, the player's operation is appropriate. Since the player may operate the touch panel with the left hand while holding the operation handle of the launcher with the right hand, that is, it may be necessary to perform two operations at the same time. Sometimes it is not possible to meet.

  The greater the threshold, the easier for the player to operate, and the smaller the threshold, the more difficult this is. The locus of input to the touch panel 246 can be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device or may be displayed on both. Moreover, in order to make a player's input operation easy on the touch panel 246, the aspect which should be input may be displayed as shown in the following figure, and a player may trace this. By doing so, an accurate input operation becomes possible. In addition, by displaying the path of the player's input operation on the upper side liquid crystal display device 244, even if the player is forced to stop the input halfway (for example, the game ball is placed in the storage box) (When it becomes full and asks a hall clerk for a new box), then the input can be resumed from the middle. In addition, since the touch panel 246 can continuously extract the player's input operation, it is possible to distinguish a sudden change in the player's input mode (for example, a sudden change in the input direction, etc.) By removing the non-conforming part, the input operation can be accurately determined even if the player's input mode may be temporarily or partially inappropriate.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the player's operation is correct, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an effect effect following the correct effect effect. The effect presentation may be performed on either or both of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In conventional gaming machines, the simple operation mode of the player has been determined, or it has not been possible to accurately determine whether the player's operation mode is appropriate. By doing so, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the operation mode performed by the player with respect to the operation mode required of the player is appropriate. Therefore, the player is satisfied that the operation of the player is correctly determined, and eagerly works on the existing touch panel in order to enhance the effect of the game during the game period. As a result, the performance enhancement function provided in the gaming machine can be exhibited during the gaming period without waste. And since the player can input in the desired direction with respect to the touch panel, even if the operation request to the player is diversified or complicated, it is possible to input the operation that can be answered by the player Thus, the player's willingness to operate the operation input device is improved, and the game quality is improved. Furthermore, since the operation requests to the player can be diversified, the adaptability of the player's input operation can be determined in stages (for example, high adaptability, medium adaptability, small adaption motion, etc.). It is also possible to change the aspect of the effect production according to the degree of. In the above-described embodiment, the touch panel is described as an input device to be operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross key, trackball, and joystick can be operated by the player in a desired direction. Etc.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, for example, in the case of reach production in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, card decorations such as mahjong tiles, playing cards, flower cards, cartes, etc. Displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 as a body, causing the player to perform an operation for turning the card decoration body as a scratch operation to the touch panel, etc., and the player's operation is appropriately performed by calculation based on the input coordinates to the touch panel. When the determination is made, the jackpot symbol is gradually emerged on the card decoration body, so that the jackpot notice effect is realized so that the player can participate. More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a mahjong tile on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 as a card ornament of a middle pattern, and predicts the pattern by tracing the mahjong tile's blind spot (the pattern surface of the mahjong tile with the thumb belly) As a simulation of the technique, the operation to turn the middle symbol by scratching is requested to be performed on the touch panel. In response to this request, the player performs a contact operation (scratch) to reciprocate the area where the mahjong tile as a medium symbol is displayed at a speed higher than a specified speed and at a specified time, so that the peripheral control MPU 4140a Assuming that the player's operation is appropriate, it is possible to realize an effect of notifying the jackpot by performing image processing in which the jackpot symbol gradually appears on the mahjong tile.

  123, after the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the reach effect image on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 124, the player inputs to the touch panel 246 of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. An effect image for prompting is displayed. As shown in FIG. 125, when the player performs an operation of scratching the mahjong tile image displayed on the touch panel 246 within a predetermined time according to this display, the mahjong tile image (1) is displayed on the mahjong tile. The jackpot symbol, the symbol before and after the jackpot symbol, a mixed symbol of both, etc.) will change to an image (2), and if the input to the touch panel is continued, The jackpot symbol (3 cords) is changed to the derived image (3). Therefore, the player can feel the result of the input to the touch panel by having the impression that the accumulated mahjong tiles have won the jackpot “3 ropes” by blind blind. If the lottery result is not a big hit, an image that goes back and forth between the image (1), the image (2), and the image (3) is displayed, and the image (1 ).

  In this way, the input to the touch panel is more advanced than operations such as simply pressing the production button, so if the lottery result is a big hit, the player will feel satisfied as if the big hit was elucidated by himself / herself be able to. However, a player who wants a calm game is not familiar with the advanced operations for the big hit announcement effect, but rather tends to prefer a simple one that presses the effect button or touches the touch panel. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a high-level operation is required at the time of the jackpot notice effect, and accordingly, a mode that achieves various jackpot notice effects, and the altitude that is relatively monotonous as the jackpot notice effect. The player can select one of the modes in which no special operation is required.

  In this selection, an item for mode selection (for example, blind mode) is displayed as one item of the menu screen when the upper liquid crystal display device 246 is in the standby state (FIG. 126), and the player selects the mode. By touching the item (Fig. 127), whether or not the advanced input (the above-mentioned blindness) is activated during the special symbol change is selected from the mode setting screen (Fig. 128). Can do. When the player selects “Description” from the mode setting screen (FIG. 128) (FIG. 129), an explanation image of the blind spot mode is displayed (FIG. 130). From the mode item (FIG. 129), the player turns off the blind mode (mode in which the blind input is not activated), the first blind mode (the mode in which the first form of blind input is activated (blind toshiro) )) When touching any one of the second blind mode (the mode in which the second form of blind spot input is activated (blind expert)), the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the selection information of the touched mode in the vicinity. A predetermined area is set in the control RAM 4150c. By providing a plurality of stages in the mode as in the first and second modes, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of the notice effect executed according to the input result.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a checks the mode information stored in the storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c when a jackpot notice is required in the case of a reach effect or the like, and when a player input is requested, According to the result of the player's input (scratch described above), the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a jackpot notice effect. When the player does not require input to the touch panel, a predetermined jackpot effect is performed.

  As another form of the notice effect of the present embodiment, the vibration device 242 described above as a configuration capable of deriving the vibration effect for the upper liquid crystal display device 246 can be used. During input to the touch panel 244, the player vibrates the vibration device 242 while changing the vibration mode of the vibration device 242 according to the input mode. This vibration enables an effect that allows the player to recognize the input operation he / she is performing three-dimensionally. For example, in a blind spot in a real mahjong game, the player expects the pattern of the samurai while holding the mahjong tiles by tracing the mahjong tiles with the thumb belly. Therefore, the vibration device 242 is caused to vibrate intermittently so as to match the actual pattern of the mahjong tiles while the player is performing a continuous contact operation such as scratching on the touch panel 246. Thus, the player can expect and predict that the mahjong tile symbol is a big hit symbol.

  After the reach effect (FIG. 123), the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays an effect image that prompts the player to make a touch input to the touch panel 246 of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, as shown in FIG. In response to this display, when the player performs a trajectory touch operation (13200, 13202) on the mahjong tile pattern displayed on the upper side liquid crystal display device 244, as shown in FIG. 131, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the vibration device 242 to vibrate at the portion (1) of the touch operation 13200 when the mahjong tile pattern is a big hit symbol (3 ropes), and (2) of the touch operation 13202 ) And (3) generate vibrations. Therefore, the player can feel the result of the input to the touch panel by having the impression that the mahjong tiles piled up by blind blindness is a big hit “3 ropes” from this form of vibration. . It should be noted that by changing the vibration mode with respect to the symbol arrangement, it is difficult for the player to predict the symbol arrangement from the vibration, and the gameability related to the prediction of the big hit symbol can be improved. . Moreover, the vibration mode can be varied by properly using the left and right vibration mechanisms described above. For example, when the left side of the mahjong tile pattern is touched, the left vibration mechanism may be vibrated, and when the right area is touched, the right vibration mechanism may be vibrated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve interest for a player who wants to enjoy the game by actively participating in the execution and execution of the production, while for a player who wants to enjoy the game calmly. By eliminating the need for a special operation, it is possible to prevent the player from being burdened even if the operation required for the performance is advanced.

[13. Game action]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is transparent by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game is fired to the upper part in the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the game panel 1200, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game board 4 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is guided to the left area of the center accessory 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503. . Further, when a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is sent into the distribution space 2530 through the distribution entry passage 2545 and then through the guide passage 2540. Are released into the gaming area 1100 on the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the downstream side of the gate part 2301 and the stage 2510.

  Then, when a game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate switch 2301, the main ball is based on the detection signal. In the control board 4100, a normal random number as a normal lottery result is generated by the normal random number generation means. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means can be easily changed by replacing it with a different table and selecting it.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 2301 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol fluctuation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol memory holding means and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the number of LEDs that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four are stored and displayed. It has become. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate switch 2301 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 1100 and flowed down the left side of the center combination 2500 are brought to the center of the game area 1100 below the center combination 2500 by the shelf portions 2202 and 2203 of the front side units. It is like that. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls The tray 301 is paid out.

  If a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, It is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the area 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, or the big winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the lowest part after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is discharged forward from the lowered central part.

  The game ball released forward from the second stage 2512 is supplied to the third stage 2513 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2512, and becomes the lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction. It is released backward from the affected part. Then, the game balls released from the third stage 2513 are arranged between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 and below the third stage 2513 on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. After being supplied to 2514 and rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, it is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Furthermore, the game ball released downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 disposed immediately below the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. , It is discharged forward from the lowest part on both the left and right sides across the center in the left-right direction and is returned to the game area 1100.

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, the chance ball 2525 opened just above the first start port 2101 It is discharged into the game area 1100 and is received by the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port switch 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  Since the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, game balls released from the stage 2510 can be received into the first start port 2101 and the like with a high probability. ing. When the second starting port 2102 is acceptable, it is highly likely that the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 can be It is possible to raise interest by giving expectation about acceptance.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is released to the upstream side of the big winning opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 through the distribution space 2530 or the like. When the winning opening 2103 is acceptable, the game ball can be received into the big winning opening 2103 with a high probability. Accordingly, in a gaming state in which the special winning opening 2103 can be accepted, it is possible to perform a driving operation of the gaming ball such that the gaming ball circulates in the distribution space 2530. In other words, when the grand prize opening 2103 is in an acceptable gaming state, the game ball can be accepted into the big prize opening 2103 with a high probability through the distribution space 2530 simply by striking the game ball more strongly than a predetermined amount. it can.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate switch 2301 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second starting port 2102 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 expands for a predetermined time to be able to win, and when the winning becomes possible, when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2102 and detected by the second starting port switch 2109, the main control A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and detected by the first start port switch 3022 and the second start port switch 2109, the main control program However, a predetermined first special random number is generated / extracted for the first start port 2101, while a predetermined second special random number is generated / extracted for the second start port 2102. After the main control program starts the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 and second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 based on the extracted special random number. The special symbol corresponding to the extracted special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests “big hit”, the big hit game does not start immediately, but first, the explanation interval effect is performed, and this explanation interval effect timer has timed out As a result, a condition device, which is a condition for executing the big hit game, is activated.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 1186 or the special symbol such as a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, a game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 When detected by the first start port switch 3022 or the second start port switch 2109, detection from the first start port switch 3022 and the second start port switch 2109 until the special symbol change display is possible. The first special start random number and the second special random number extracted based on the signal are stored in the first start storage information storage area (first start storage information storage means) and the second start storage information. The display is stored in the storage area (second starting storage information storage means) and the display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is stored in the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the second special symbol storage. Display is made on the display 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this embodiment, up to four of each are stored and displayed. Note that when the number of memories exceeds 4, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (suspended) in the second starting storage information storage area is executed (digested) in preference to the first special random number stored in the first instruction information storage area by the priority hold digest means. ). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  In the main control board 4100, the main control program can predetermine the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port switch 3022 and the second start port switch 2109. In addition, by comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), it is determined whether the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”, and a special symbol stop symbol ( In the case of “losing symbols” (first special symbol variation pattern selection means, second special symbol variation pattern selection means). In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (the special lottery result) extracted (lottery) when triggered by the winning prize of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are “big hit” In this case, as described above, the main control program activates a condition device that is a condition for executing the big hit game based on the time-out of the explanation interval effect timer.

  The advantageous game state generation means executes a big hit game advantageous to the player, and after opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106A of the attacker unit 2100A or the opening / closing member 2106B of the attacker unit 2100B, the advantageous game state generating means Seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103A or the winning prize opening 2103B, the opening / closing member 2106A or the opening / closing member 2106B is closed. A round game of patterns (a single opening / closing pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). If “2R big hit”, 2 rounds, “6R big hit” 6 Round, 12 rounds for “12R jackpot”, 16 rounds for “16R jackpot”, respectively It returns, and is adapted to generate a favorable advantageous gaming state to the player. After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, the random number determination table is replaced with a high-probability time / short table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means according to the extracted special random number. Note that the mode of the big hit game is not limited to the round game described above as long as a predetermined amount of prize balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 has a distribution detection sensor based on the operation of the condition device. The detection signal of the game ball from 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is made ready to be received, and the number of rounds of the “big hit” game is determined according to which distribution detection sensor 2580L, 2580R first receives the detection signal. I try to decide.

  When the game ball detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 can be received, the relationship between the gate 2575 through which the game ball has passed and the number of rounds is previously stored in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is displayed. That is, “When a game ball is passed to the left gate 2575L, it is determined by lottery among 12 rounds and 6 rounds”, and “16 rounds when a game ball is passed to the right gate 2575R” The relationship between the gate to which the game ball passes and the number of rounds determined based on having passed through the gate, such as “determined by lottery of two rounds” 1900 etc. are displayed.

  Thus, the game ball can be driven while watching the movement of the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 so that the game ball passes through the desired gate 2575 to the player. In addition to being able to entertain the operation, it is possible to make the game balls in the distribution space 2530 sort out and to be thrilled, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating and delighting the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (in accordance with the special lottery result) Accordingly, in addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 being variably displayed, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 also displays a special random number (special lottery result). A corresponding effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows). When the symbols are sequentially stopped and finally all the symbol sequences are finally stopped, the judgment result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. . That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are displayed in a variable manner is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, generally, a player will use the game board side liquid crystal. Attention is paid to the symbols displayed on the display device 1900 and the like.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. Further, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100, whereas the game board side liquid crystal display. The variation display of the symbols in the apparatus 1900 and the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. .

  As a result, the variation display of the symbols on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like, so that the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is displayed. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for a certain command so that the symbol variation patterns in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can be increased. Also, the “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the player can be more entertained and less likely to get bored.

  By the way, if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, as described above, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 indicate that it is a “big hit”. The special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner. However, the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment have different roles to play from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, for one result such as the “big hit”, the harassment type and the pounding type. Two types of big hit forms such as types are given to the player. In this embodiment, the processing mode until the mode of the big hit game to be executed is determined as the big hit type is different between the pounding type and the pounding type. And when two types with different big hit forms, such as a harassment type and a pounding type, are given to a player, one of these will be selected. In the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated, a game ball fired toward the game ball by the player passes the left gate 2575L, and the harassment type is selected. A type is selected.

  It can be said that hits with different execution modes of jackpot games belong to the harassment type and the pounding type. More specifically, as can be seen from FIG. 104, when it is a big hit of the normal type (see Table A), for the harassment type (left gate 2575L), from the 9th round corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition However, a 6-round jackpot game where only a small amount of game balls can be obtained is executed, and a 12-round jackpot game where a slightly larger number of game balls can be obtained than the 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of the game ball is executed. It can be said that Ruto belongs. In addition, when it is a big hit of a specific type (see Table B), for a bad type (left gate 2575L), a big hit of 16 rounds that can acquire a larger amount of game balls than 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition It can be said that only the game is played.

  Similarly, looking at the pounding type with reference to FIG. 104, when it is a big hit of the normal type (see Table A), the pounding type (right gate 2575R) is equivalent to the expected value of game ball acquisition 9 There are 16 rounds of jackpot game that can win a lot of game balls than the 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of game balls, and when two rounds of jackpot game where only a small amount of game balls can be obtained than the round are executed It can be said that hits to be executed belong. In addition, when it is a big hit of a specific type (see Table B), for the pounding type (see right gate 2575R), 16 rounds of game balls can be obtained that are larger than 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition. It can be said that only the jackpot game is executed.

  When a game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of a specific type when passing through the right gate 2575R. If it is a big hit of a specific type, refer to the table B in FIG. It is determined when 16 rounds of jackpot game are executed with a probability of 100%, and if it is not a specific type of jackpot, referring to Table A in FIG. When the big hit game is executed, it is determined by lottery.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of a specific type when passing through the left gate 2575L. If it is a big hit of a specific type, refer to the table B in FIG. Then, it is determined when 16 rounds of jackpot game is executed with a probability of 100%. If it is not a specific type of jackpot game, referring to Table A in FIG. When the big hit game of the round is executed, it is determined by lottery. Then, as a result, when the player hits a specific type of jackpot, a 16-round jackpot game is executed regardless of whether the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. It will be decided at the moment.

  By the way, although the mode of the big hit game to be executed is determined when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, whether or not the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type of big hit. This is determined in step S6316. Therefore, in the case of a big hit of a specific type, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, before the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R (for example, the result of the first special lottery on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 or the second When the result of two special lotteries is displayed), a display effect indicating that a 16-round jackpot game is executed is performed.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, as long as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit of the normal type, when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, The big hit form (smooth type or pounding type) is selected. Then, it is determined for any one of the hits belonging to the selected big hit form, and the big hit game is executed in the execution form of the big hit game corresponding to the determined hit.

  In other words, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the functions to be performed by the gates 2585L and 2575R differ depending on the type of the big win.

  Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is determined that the big hit symbol is 7 out of the big hit symbols 0 to 9, and the big hit symbol is determined. When a jackpot symbol other than 7 is acquired from symbols 0 to 9, it is determined that the normal type jackpot. As described above, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is determined that the normal type big hit is made with a high probability, so the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensor 2580L). , 2580R) always functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game. In other words, Step S6075 and Step S6079 executed by the main control MPU 4100a respectively set the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L), and always perform the big hit game execution mode. It will serve as a functioning means that functions as a member to be determined.

  However, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type big hit, the execution mode of the big hit game with reference to the table B in FIG. 104 when the game ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R. However, this lottery is merely a formal lottery in which the execution mode of the jackpot is determined in advance. In other words, since the game balls are passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R, a predetermined 16-round big hit game is executed, so the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, distribution) The detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as an execution opportunity for the big hit game.

  That is, since it is always determined as NO in step S6073 and step S6077, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) always perform the big hit game execution mode by step S6075 and step S6079. However, only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a special type big hit, it is determined YES in steps S6073 and S6077, and gates 2575L and 2575R (from Specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as members that determine the execution mode of the big hit game.

  In this embodiment, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) always function as members that determine the execution mode of the big hit game, and the first special lottery Only when the result or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, the role to be played by functioning as a member that determines the execution trigger of the jackpot game has been changed, but the function as the gate 2575 is changed. The aspect is not limited to this.

  For example, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the harassment type is selected, and when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, the pounding type is selected. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the harassment type when passing and selecting the pounding type when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L.

  Also, for example, it is always possible to select either the harassment type or the pounding type according to the gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game balls pass, and when the specific condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through any gate 2575 Alternatively, the function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the selected big hit form to a pounding type (or a harassment type). Furthermore, even if a game ball is allowed to pass through any gate 2575, only the harassment type (or pounding type) is selected. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the harassment type or the The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the pounding type.

  Furthermore, even if a game ball is allowed to pass through any gate 2575, only the harassment type (or pounding type) is selected. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the harassment type or the The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the pounding type.

  In addition, for example, when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R where the pounding type is selected, the first mode of the big hit game is executed and the second type of the big hit game is executed. If the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R where the pounding type is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, the big hit game is executed in a mode different from the first mode and the second mode. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by determining it as one of a plurality of hits including (that is, even if it is the same in terms of the pounding type, The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the hits to which it belongs).

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 244 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 Touch panel 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display device 4100 Main control board 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

A game control means for determining success or failure of the winning condition by a game based on the game medium, and when the winning condition is satisfied, transitioning from a normal gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
In the advantageous gaming state, a privilege giving means for giving a player an opportunity to acquire a game medium;
Effect control means for determining an effect operation based on the control by the game control means;
Display means;
A time measuring means for measuring a predetermined time;
Game information recording means for recording information of the game controlled by the game control means;
A game comprising
The production control means includes
First display control means for performing a first display control process for determining a display operation as the effect operation and displaying on the display means;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game without being based on the success / failure determination of the winning condition;
Second display control means for performing a second display control process for displaying the game result of the special game execution means on the display means;
When the measurement result of the timing means satisfies a predetermined condition, when the recorded information of the game information recording means is a predetermined value or more, the player is allowed to execute the special game, and the measurement result of the timing means is If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, an enabling unit that does not allow a player to execute the special game even if the recorded information is equal to or greater than the predetermined value;
A gaming machine comprising: